Maths Frameworking PB 8.

3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:47 Page i

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Year 8, Pupil Book 3

NEW MATHS
FRAMEWORKING
Matches the revised KS3 Framework

Kevin Evans, Keith Gordon, Trevor Senior, Brian Speed

Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 1

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

CHAPTER 1 Number and Algebra 1

This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
How to multiply and divide How to add and subtract
negative numbers negative integers
How to find the highest common How to generate terms of a
factor and the lowest common simple number sequence
multiple of sets of numbers Recognise the square and
How to find the prime factors of triangle number sequences
a number How to test numbers for
How to generate and describe divisibility
number patterns

Multiplying and dividing negative numbers

1 3 = 6
Example 1.1 Find the missing number in: a b 12 1 = 3
a The inverse problem is 1 = 6 +3, so the missing number is 2
b The inverse problem is 1 = 12 +3, so the missing number is 4

Example 1.2 Work out: a 3 2 + 5 b 3 (2 + 5)

a Using BODMAS, do 3 2 first: 3 2 + 5 = +6 + 5 = +11
b This time the bracket must be done first: 3 (2 + 5) = 3 +3 = 9

Example 1.3 Work out: a (3 + 1)2 3 b (+2 5) (2 + 5)2

a Using BODMAS, do the bracket first: (3 + 1)2 3 = (2)2 3 = 4 3 = 12
b (+2 5) (2 + 5)2 = 3 32 = 3 9 = 27

Exercise 1A Work out the following.

a 7 + 8 b 2 7 c +6 2 + 3 d 6 1 + 7 e 3 + 4 9
f 3 7 g 4 + 6 h +7 +6 i 3 7 + 8 j 5 + 4 7

1
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 2

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

In these walls, subtract the right-hand from the left-hand number to find the number
in the brick below.
a 7 2 4 1 5 b 6 2 3 4 1
9 6 4 5

48 37

6 Work out the answer to each of these.

a +5 3 b 3 4 c 7 +12 d 16 3
e 3 +24 f +16 7 g +18 +4 h 25 14
i 12 3 2 j 12 +4 5 k +72 3 l 24 4
m 64 +8 n 36 3 o 328 +8 p +6 10
q +4 8 r 35 2 s 12 3 24 t 12 3 6

The answer to the question on this blackboard is 12.

Using multiplication and/or division signs, write down
at least five different calculations that give this answer.

Copy and complete the following multiplication grids.

a 2 3 4 5 b 1 3 4 c 8
3 6 2 6 2 12
6 12 15 21
2 5 4 28
5 7 42 30

Find the missing number in each calculation. (Remember that the numbers without a
+ or sign in front of them are actually positive, as we do not always show every
positive sign when writing a calculation.)
a 2 3 = 1 b 2 1 = 8 c 3 1 = 9
d 4 6 = 3 1 = 24
1 5 = 15 e f
1
1 6 = 36
g 64 1 = 32 h i 2 3 = 1

1 6 = 48
j k 2 1 3 = 12 l 1 4 = 2
m 5 4 1 = 10 5 1 2 = 10 1 4 2 = 14
n o

Work out the following.

a 2 2 b 4 4 c (3)2 d (6)2
e Explain why it is impossible to get a negative answer when you square any number.

2
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 3

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Work out the following.

a
e
2 3 + 4
5 4 + 6
b
f
2 (3 + 4)
5 (4 + 6)
c
g
2 + 3 4
12 6 + 2
d
h
(2 + 3) 4
12 (6 + 2)
6
Put brackets in each of these to make them true.
a 2 5 + 4 = 2 b 2 + 6 3 = 24 c 952=6

Work out the answer to each of these.

a (4)2 +3 b 3 (5)2 c 12 (2)2
d (4 + 6)2 2 e 7 (7 + 4)2 f (5 2)2 (3 5)2
g 12 (6 + 4)2 h (7 + 4)2 (2)2 i 6 (2 + 6)2

Calculators work in different ways. Make sure you can use the sign-change and
brackets keys on your calculator.
2
Work out 42. On your calculator, you might key in 4 x = .
2
Now work out (4)2. Key in ( 4 ) x = .
Explain why the answers are different.

This is an algebraic magic square.

a+c cab b+c
What is the Magic expression that every row, column
and diagonal adds up to?
Find the value in each cell when a = 7, b = 9, c = 2. b+ca c a+cb
Find the value in each cell when a = 1, b = 3, c = 5.

cb a+b+c ca

HCF and LCM

Remember that:
HCF stands for highest common factor
LCM stands for lowest common multiple
Look at the diagrams. What do you think they are showing?

F actor 28 32
s
s of 3 0
to r
24
of

36

a c 12
24

15 1
F

30
30 2 3 44 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
5 10 6 8
4
16

24
8 12
4

3
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 4

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 1.4 Find the lowest common multiple (LCM) of the following pairs of numbers.
a 3 and 7 b 6 and 9
a Write out the first few multiples of each number:
3, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, 27,
7, 14, 21, 28, 35,
You can see that the LCM of 3 and 7 is 21.
b Write out the multiples of each number: 6, 12, 18 , 24,
9, 18 , 27, 36,
You can see that the LCM of 6 and 9 is 18.

Example 1.5 Find the highest common factor (HCF) of the following pairs of numbers.
a 15 and 21 b 16 and 24
a Write out the factors of each number: 1, 3, 5, 15
1, 3, 7, 21
You can see that the HCF of 15 and 21 is 3.
b Write out the factors of each number: 1, 2, 4, 8 , 16
1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8 , 12, 24
You can see that the HCF of 16 and 24 is 8.

4 Exercise 1B Write down the first five multiples of the following numbers.
a 4 b 5 c 8 d 15 e 20

Write down all the factors of the following numbers.

a 15 b 20 c 32 d 35 e 60

Use your answers to Question 1 to help find the LCM of the following pairs of numbers.
a 5 and 8 b 4 and 20 c 4 and 15 d 8 and 15

Use your answers to Question 2 to help find the HCF of the following pairs of numbers.
a 15 and 20 b 15 and 60 c 20 and 60 d 20 and 32

6 Find the LCM of the following pairs.

a 5 and 9 b 5 and 25 c 3 and 8 d 4 and 6
e 8 and 12 f 12 and 15 g 9 and 21 h 7 and 11

Find the HCF of the following pairs.

a 15 and 18 b 12 and 32 c 12 and 22 d 8 and 12
e 2 and 18 f 8 and 18 g 18 and 27 h 7 and 11

7 a
b
c
Two numbers have an LCM of 24 and an HCF of 2. What are they?
Two numbers have an LCM of 18 and an HCF of 3. What are they?
Two numbers have an LCM of 60 and an HCF of 5. What are they?

4
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 5

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

a What is the HCF and the LCM of: i 5, 7 ii 3, 4 iii 2, 11.

b Two numbers, x and y, have an HCF of 1. What is the LCM of x and y? 7
a What is the HCF and LCM of: i 5, 10 ii 3, 18 iii 4, 20.
b Two numbers, x and y (where y is bigger than x), have an HCF of x. What is the
LCM of x and y?

Copy and complete the table.

x y Product HCF LCM
4 14 56 2 28
9 21
12 21
18 24

Describe any relationships that you can see in the table.

The triangle numbers are T1 = 1, T2 = 3, T3 = 6, T4 = 10, T5 = 15, T6 = 21,

The nth triangle number is Tn.
6
Investigate whether these statements are always true.
The sum of two consecutive triangle numbers is always a square number,
for example, T1 + T2 = 1 + 3 = 4 = 22
If T is a triangle number then 9 T + 1 is also a triangle number,
for example, 9 T1 + 1 = 9 1 + 1 = 10 = T4
A triangle number can never end in 2, 4, 7 or 9.
If T is a triangle number then 8 T + 1 is always a square number,
for example, 8 T1 + 1 = 8 1 + 1 = 9 = 32
If you keep on working out the sum of digits of any triangle number until
a single digit is obtained the answer is always 1, 3, 6 or 9.
The sum of n consecutive cubes starting from 1 is equal to the square of
the nth triangle number,
for example, T42 = 102 = 100 = 13 + 23 + 33 + 43

Powers and roots

Look at these cubes. Is cube B twice
as big, four times as big or eight times
as big as cube A? How many times
bigger is cube C than cube A?

A B C

5
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 6

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 1.6 Use a calculator to work out: a 43 b 5.52 c (3)4

a 43 = 4 4 4 = 64
b 5.52 = 5.5 5.5 = 30.25 (most calculators have a button for squaring,
2
usually marked x )
c (3)4 = 3 3 3 3 = +9 +9 = 81

Example 1.7 Use a calculator to work out: a 12.25 b 33 124

a Depending on your calculator, sometimes you type the square root before the
number, and sometimes the number comes first. Make sure you can use your
calculator. The answer is 3.5.
b The answer is 182.

Exercise 1C The diagrams at the beginning of this section show cubes made from smaller 1 cm
cubes. Copy and complete this table.

Length of side 1 cm 2 cm 3 cm 4 cm 5 cm 6 cm 7 cm 8 cm 9 cm 10 cm
Area of face 1 cm2 4 cm2 9 cm2
Volume of cube 1 cm3 8 cm3 27 cm3

Use the table in Question 1 to work out the following.

a 4 b 64 c 81 d 100 e 25
3 3 3 3 3
f 27 g 125 h 1000 i 512 j 729

Find two values of x that make the following equations true.

a x2 = 36 b x2 = 121 c x2 = 144 d x2 = 2.25
e x2 = 196 f x2 = 5.76 g x2 = 2.56 h x2 = 3600

Use a calculator to find the value of the following.

a 132 b 133 c 152 d 153 e 212 f 213
g 1.42 h 1.83 i 2.33 j 4.52 k 123 l 1.53

Use a calculator to find the value of the following.

a 24 b 35 c 34 d 25 e (4)4 f 54
g 74 h 83 i (2)7 j 29 k 210 l 310

Without using a calculator, write down the values of the following. (Hint: Use the
table in Question 1 and some of the answers from Question 5 to help you.)
a 202 b 303 c 503 d 205 e 702 f 2003

102 = 100, 103 = 1000: Copy and complete the following table.

Number 100 1000 10 000 100 000 1000 000 10 000 000
Power of 10 102 103

6
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 7

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Work out: a 12 b 13 c 14 d 15 e 16
f Write down the value of 1223

Work out: a
f
(1)2 b (1)3 c (1)4 d (1)5
Write down the value of: i (1)223 ii
e (1)6
(1)224 6
You can see from the table in Question 1 that 64 is a square number (82) and a cube
number (43).
a One other cube number (apart from 1) in the table is also a square number.
Which is it?
b Which is the next cube number that is also a square number?
(Hint: Look at the pattern of such cube numbers so far, i.e. 13, 43, .)

If you have a basic calculator with only + keys, how can you
find a square root?
For example, find 7 to two decimal places.
You know that the answer is between 2 and 3 (4 = 2 and 9 = 3).
Try 2.52 = 6.25. This is too low.
Try 2.62 = 6.76. This is too low.
Try 2.72 = 7.29. This is too high.
Try 2.652 = 7.0225. This is very close but a bit high.
Try 2.642 = 6.9696. This is very close but too low.
The answer is 7 = 2.65 to two decimal places.
Using only the key, find the following square roots to two decimal places.
1 20 2 15 3 120 4 70
A computer spreadsheet can be used for this activity.

Prime factors
What are the prime factors of 120 and 210?

5 3 210
2 2
42
12 2
60 5
4 6
7
120 2
3

7
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 8

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 1.8 Write 18 as the product of its prime factors.

18
Using a prime factor tree, split 18 into 3 6 and 6 into 3 2.
The prime factors of 18 are 2, 3, 3. 3 6
So, 18 = 2 3 3 = 2 32
3 2

Example 1.9 Write 24 as the product of its prime factors.

Using the division method: 2 | 24
2 | 12
2| 6
3| 3
1
The prime factors of 24 are 2, 2, 2, 3.
So, 24 = 2 2 2 3 = 23 3

Example 1.10 Use prime factors to find the highest common factor (HCF) and lowest common
multiple (LCM) of 24 and 54.
24 = 2 2 2 3, 54 = 2 3 3 3 24 54
2 2 3
You can see that 2 3 is common to both lists of prime factors.
2 3 3
Put these in the centre, overlapping, part of the diagram.
Put the other prime factors in the outside of the diagram.
The product of the centre numbers, 2 3 = 6, is the HCF.
The product of all the numbers, 2 2 2 3 3 3 = 216, is the LCM.

6 Exercise 1D These are the products of the prime factors of some numbers. What are the numbers?
a 223 b 2335 c 2 2 32 d 2 33 5 e 2 3 52

Using a prime factor tree, work out the prime factors of the following.
a 8 b 10 c 16 d 20 e 28
f 34 g 35 h 52 i 60 j 180

Using the division method, work out the prime factors of the following.
a 42 b 75 c 140 d 250 e 480

7 Using the diagrams below, work out the HCF and LCM of the following pairs.
a
30 72
b
50 90
c
48 84
2 2 2 3 2 2
5 2 5 3 7
3 3 5 3 2 2

30 and 72 50 and 90 48 and 84

8
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 9

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

The prime factors of 120 are 2, 2, 2, 3, 5. The prime factors of 150 are 2, 3, 5, 5.
Put these numbers into a diagram like those in Question 4.
Use the diagram to work out the HCF and LCM of 120 and 150.
7
The prime factors of 210 are 2, 3, 5, 7. The prime factors of 90 are 2, 3, 3, 5.
Put these numbers into a diagram like those in Question 4.
Use the diagram to work out the HCF and LCM of 210 and 90.

The prime factors of 240 are 2, 2, 2, 2, 3, 5. The prime factors of 900 are
2, 2, 3, 3, 5, 5.
Put these numbers into a diagram like those in Question 4.
Use the diagram to work out the HCF and LCM of 240 and 900.

Use prime factors to work out the HCF and LCM of the following pairs.
a 200 and 175 b 56 and 360 c 42 and 105

Find the LCM of the following pairs.

a 56 and 70 b 28 and 38 c 18 and 32

1 Show that 60 has 12 factors.

Find three more numbers less than 100 that also have 12 factors.
2 Show that 36 has nine factors.
There are seven other numbers greater than 1 and less than 100 with an
odd number of factors.
Find them all. What sort of numbers are they?
3 There are 69 three-digit multiples of 13. The first is 104 and the last
is 988.
Five of these have a digit sum equal to 13.
For example, 715 is a multiple of 13 and 7 + 1 + 5 = 13.
Find the other four.
You may find a computer spreadsheet useful for this activity.

Sequences 1

Example 1.11
Is
Write Write down answer YES
Start Divide by 2 less than Stop
down 256 answer
1?

NO
Follow the above flow diagram through to the end and write down the
numbers generated.
These are 256, 128, 64, 32, 16, 8, 4, 2, 1, 0.5.

9
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 10

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 1.12 For each of the following sequences: i describe how it is being generated.
ii find the next two terms.
a 2, 6, 10, 14, 18, 22, b 1, 3, 27, 81, 243,
i The sequence is going up by 4 i Each term is multiplied by 3
ii The next two terms are 26, 30 ii The next two terms are 729, 2187

Exercise 1E Follow these instructions to generate sequences.

a
Is
Write Write down answer YES
Start Add on 5 more than Stop
down 3 answer
40?

NO

b Is
Write Add Write down answer YES
Start X=3 more than Stop
down 1 on X answer
100?
Increase X NO
by 2
c
Is
Write Multiply Write down answer YES
Start more than Stop
down 10 by 10 answer 1000 000?

NO

What is the name of the sequence of numbers generated by the flow diagram in
Question 1b?

Describe in words the sequence of numbers generated by the flow diagram in

Question 1c.

Describe how the sequences below are generated.

a 1, 4, 7, 10, 13, 16, b 1, 4, 16, 64, 256, 1024,
c 1, 4, 8, 13, 19, 26, d 1, 4, 9, 16, 25, 36,

Write down four sequences beginning 1, 5, , and explain how each of them is
generated.

Describe how each of the following sequences is generated and write down the next
two terms.
a 40, 41, 43, 46, 50, 55, b 90, 89, 87, 84, 80, 75,
c 1, 3, 7, 13, 21, 31, d 2, 6, 12, 20, 30, 42,

10
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 11

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

You are given a start number and a multiplier. Write down at least the first six terms of
the sequences (for example, start 2 and multiplier 3 gives 2, 6, 18, 54, 162, 486, ).
a start 1, multiplier 3 b start 2, multiplier 2 c start 1, multiplier 1
d start 1, multiplier 0.5 e start 2, multiplier 0.4 f start 1, multiplier 0.3

The following patterns of dots generate sequences of numbers.

i Draw the next two patterns of dots.
ii Write down the next four numbers in the sequence.
a b

c d

a Draw a flow diagram to generate the triangle numbers 1, 3, 6, 10, 15, 21, .
(Hint: Look at the differences between consecutive terms and compare with
those in the sequence from Question 1b.)
7
b Draw a flow diagram to generate the sequence of powers of 2 (2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, ).

Fibonacci numbers
You will need a calculator.
6
A Fibonacci sequence is: 1, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13, 21,
It is formed by writing down 1, 1 and then adding together the previous two terms,
that is 5 = 3 + 2, 8 = 5 + 3, etc.
Write down the next five terms of the sequence.
Now divide each term by the previous term, that is 1 1 = 1, 2 1 = 2,
3 2 = 1.5, 5 3 =
You should notice something happening.
You may find a computer spreadsheet useful for this activity.
If you have access to a library or the Internet, find out about the Italian
mathematician after whom the sequence is named.

Sequences 2
Paving slabs 1 metre square are used to put borders around square ponds. For example:

1 1 m2 pond
8 slabs 2 2 m2 pond
12 slabs 3 3 m2 pond 4 4 m2 pond
16 slabs 20 slabs
How many slabs would fit around a 5 5 m pond? What about a 100 100 m2 pond?
2

11
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 12

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 1.13 Generate sequences using the rules given.

a First term 5, increase each term by a constant difference of 6.
b First term 32, multiply each term by 12.
c First term 3, subtract 1 then multiply by 2.

a The sequence is 5, 5 + 6 = 11, 11 + 6 = 17, , which gives 5, 11, 17, 23, 29, 35,
b The sequence is 32, 32 12 = 16, 16 12 = 8, etc., which gives 32, 16, 8,
4, 2, 1, 12, 14,
c The sequence is 3, (3 1) 2 = 4, (4 1) 2 = 6, (6 1) 2 = 10, etc., which
gives 3, 4, 6, 10, 18, 34, 66,

We can describe sequences by giving a rule for any term. This is called the general or nth
term and is an algebraic expression.

Example 1.14 The nth term of the sequence 9, 13, 17, 21, 25, is given by the expression 4n + 5.
a Show this is true for the first three terms.
b Use the rule to find the 50th term of the sequence.

a Let n = 1, 41+5=4+5=9
Let n = 2, 4 2 + 5 = 8 + 5 = 13
Let n = 3, 4 3 + 5 = 12 + 5 = 17
b Let n = 50, 4 50 + 5 = 200 + 5 = 205
so the 50th term is 205.

We can describe a sequence by finding the nth term. This is the generalisation that will
allow us to find any specific term.

Example 1.15 Look at the sequence with the following pattern.

(term)
Pattern number 1 2 3
Number of matchsticks 7 12 17
a Find the generalisation (nth term) of the pattern.
b Find the 50th term in the sequence.

a The terms go up by 5 so the nth term is based on 5n.

The first term is 7.
For the first term n = 1
So 5 1 + 2 = 7, giving
nth term = 5n + 2
b 50th term = 5 50 + 2 = 252

12
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 13

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 1.16 Find the nth term of the sequence 3, 10, 17, 24, 31,

The sequence goes up by 7 each time, so the nth term is based on 7n.
The first term is 3, and 3 7 = 4, so the nth term is 7n 4.

Exercise 1F For the following arithmetic sequences, write down the first term a and the constant
difference d.
a 4, 9, 14, 19, 24, 29, b 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11,
c 3, 9, 15, 21, 27, 33, d 5, 3, 1, 1, 3, 5,

Given the first term a and the constant difference d, write down the first six terms of
each of these sequences.
a a = 1, d = 7 b a = 3, d = 2 c a = 5, d = 4
d a = 0.5, d = 1.5 e a = 4, d = 3 f a = 2, d = 0.5

The following flow diagram can be used to generate sequences.

Is YES
6
Use answer
Write Write down
Start term-to-term equal to Stop
down A next term
rule L?

NO
For example, if A = 8, the term-to-term rule is halve and L = 0.25, the sequence is:
8, 4, 2, 1, 0.5, 0.25
Write down the sequences generated by:

A Term-to-term rule L
a 1000 000 Divide by 10 1
b 1 Add 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, etc. 225
c 1 Double 1024
d 10 Subtract 5 25
e 3 Add 2 23
f 1 Multiply by 2 1024
g 48 Halve 0.75
h 1 Double and add 1 63
i 2 Times by 3 and subtract 1 365
j 0 Add 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, etc. 55

13
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 14

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

6 The nth term of sequences are given by the rules below. Use this to write down the
first five terms of each sequence.
a 2n 1 b 2n + 3 c 2n + 2 d 2n + 1
e What is the constant difference in each of the sequences in ad?

The nth term of sequences are given by the rules below. Use this to write down the
first five terms of each sequence.
a 3n + 1 b 3n + 2 c 3n 2 d 3n 1
e What is the constant difference in each of the sequences in ad?

The nth term of sequences are given by the rules below. Use this to write down the
first five terms of each sequence.
a 5n 1 b 5n + 2 c 5n 4 d 5n + 3
e What is the constant difference in each of the sequences in ad?

For each of the sequences whose nth term is given below, find:
i the first three terms. ii the 100th term.
a n+1 b 3n 1 c 2n 3
d 5n 2 e 4n 3 f 9n + 1
1
g 2n + 1 h 6n + 1 i 1 21 n 12

For each of the patterns below, find:

i the nth term for the number of matchsticks.
ii the number of matchsticks in the 50th term.
a

Find the nth term of each of these sequences.

a 4, 10, 16, 22, 28, b 9, 12, 15, 18, 21,
c 9, 15, 21, 27, 33, d 2, 5, 8, 11, 14,
e 2, 9, 16, 23, 30, f 8, 10, 12, 14, 16,
g 10, 14, 18, 22, 26, h 3, 11, 19, 27, 35,
i 9, 19, 29, 39, 49, j 4, 13, 22, 31, 40,

14
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 15

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Write down a first term A and a term-to-term rule that you can use in the flow
diagram in Question 3 so that:
a each term of the sequence is even.
7
b each term of the sequence is odd.
c the sequence is the 5 times table.
d the sequence is the triangle numbers.
e the numbers in the sequence all end in 1.
f the sequence has alternating odd and even terms.
g the sequence has alternating positive and negative terms.

For each of the sequences whose nth term is given below, find:
i the first three terms. ii the 99th term.
6
a 2(n + 1)2 b (n 1)(n + 1) c 1
2(n
+ 1)(n + 2)

Solving problems
An investigation
At the start of the last section you were asked to say how many slabs would be needed to
go round a square pond.

1 1 pond
8 slabs 2 2 pond
12 slabs 3 3 pond 4 4 pond
16 slabs 20 slabs
To solve this problem you need to:
Step 1: break the problem into simple parts.
Step 2: set up a table of results.
Step 3: predict and test a rule.
Step 4: use your rule to answer the question.
Step 1
This is already done with the diagrams given.
Step 2
Pond side Number of slabs
1 8
2 12
3 16
4 20

15
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 16

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Step 3
Use the table to spot how the sequence is growing.
In this case, it is increasing in 4s.
So a 5 5 pond will need 24 slabs (see right).
We can also say that the number of slabs S is 4 times the
pond side (P) plus 4, which we can write as:
S = 4P + 4
There are many other ways to write this rule, and many ways of showing that it is true.
For example: 4P + 4 2(P + 2) + 2P 4(P + 1)
1 P 1 P + 2 P + 1

P + 1

P + 1
P P P P

1 P 1 P + 2 P + 1
Step 4
We can now use any rule to say that for a 100 100 pond, 4 100 + 4 = 404 slabs will
be needed.

Exercise 1G Do the following investigations. Make sure you follow the steps above and explain what
you are doing clearly. In each investigation you are given some hints.

6 Write a rule to show how many square slabs it takes to make a border around
rectangular ponds.
First side Second side Slabs
1 2 10
1 3 12
2 3 14

The final score in a football match was 54. How many different half-time scores
could there have been?
For a match that ended 00, there is only one possible half-time result (00).
For a match that ended 12, there are six possible half-time scores (00, 01, 02,
10, 11, 12).
Take some other low-scoring matches, such as 11, 21, 20, etc., and work out the
half-time scores for these.
Set up a table like the one in Question 1.

There are 13 stairs in most houses. How many different ways are there of going up
the stairs in a combination of one step or two steps at a time?

Take one stair. There is only one way of going up it (1).

16
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 17

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Take two stairs. There are two ways of going up (1+1, 2). 6
Before you think this is going to be easy, look at five stairs. There are eight ways of
going up them (1+1+1+1+1, 1+1+1+2, 1+2+1+1, 1+1+2+1, 1+2+2, 2+1+2, 2+2+1,
2+1+1+1).

Work out the number of ways for three stairs and four stairs. Draw up a table and see
if you can spot the rule!

4 I can write down the multiples of any whole number.

I can work out the factors of numbers under 100.

5 I can add and subtract negative numbers.

I can write down and recognise the sequence of square numbers.
I know the squares of all numbers up to 152 and the corresponding square roots.
I can use a calculator to work out powers of numbers.
I can find any term in a sequence given the first term and the term-to-term rule.
I know that the square roots of positive numbers can have two values, one positive and one
negative.

6 I can multiply and divide negative numbers.

I can find the lowest common multiple (LCM) for pairs of numbers.
I can find the highest common factor (HCF) for pairs of numbers.
I can write a number as the product of its prime factors.
I can find any term in a sequence given the algebraic rule for the nth term.
I can find the nth term of a sequence in the form an + b.
I can investigate a mathematical problem.

7 I can work out the LCM and HCF of two numbers using prime factors.
I can devise flow diagrams to generate sequences.

17
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 18

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

1 2000 Paper 1

6 a Two numbers multiply together to make 15. They add together to make 2.
What are the two numbers?

b Two numbers multiply together to make 15, but add together to make 2.
What are the two numbers?

c The square of 5 is 25. The square of another number is also 25.

What is that other number?

2 2007 Paper 2
Look at the information.

x=4 y = 13

Copy and complete the rules below to show different ways to get y using x.
The first one is done for you.

To get y, multiply x by 2 and add 5

This can be written as y = 2x + 5

To get y, multiply x by ___ and add ___

This can be written as y = _____

To get y, multiply x by ___ and subtract ___

This can be written as y = _____

To get y, divide x by ___ and add ___

This can be written as y = _____

3 2006 Paper 1

a Put these values in order of size with the smallest first:

52 32 33 24

b Look at this information:

55 is 3125

What is 57?

4 2006 Paper 2
Look at these pairs of number sequences.
The second sequence is formed from the first sequence by adding a number or multiplying by a number.
Work out the missing nth terms.

a 5, 9, 13, 17, nth term is 4n + 1

6, 10, 14, 18, nth term is

18
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 19

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

b 12, 18, 24, 30, nth term is 6n + 6

c
6,

2,
9,

7,
12,

12,
15,

17,

nth term is
nth term is 5n 3
6
4, 14, 24, 34, nth term is

5 2007 Paper 1

a Copy the following and draw lines to match each nth term rule to its number sequence. 7
4n 4, 7, 12, 19,

(n + 1)2 4, 8, 12, 16,

n2 + 3 4, 9, 16, 25,

n(n + 3) 4, 10, 18, 28,

b Write the first four terms of the number sequence using the nth term rule below:

n3 + 3 , , ,

6 2007 Paper 1
Here is the rule to find the geometric mean of two numbers.

Multiply the two numbers together,

then find the square root of the result.

Example: geometric mean of 4 and 9 = 4 9

= 36
=6

a For the two numbers 10 and x, the geometric mean is 30.

What is the value of x?

b Reena says:
For the two numbers 2 and 8, it is impossible to find the geometric mean.
Is Reena correct?
Explain your answer.

19
FM Ch 1 Blackpool PB 8.3 30/4/08 17:14 Page 20

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Functional Maths

Blackpool Tower

Blackpool Tower is a tourist attraction in Blackpool, Lancashire, England. It opened to the

public on 14 May 1894. Inspired by the Eiffel Tower in Paris, it rises to 518 ft 9 inches.
The foundation stone was laid on 29 September 1891. The total cost for the design and
construction of the Tower and buildings was about 290 000. Five million bricks, 2500
tonnes of steel and 93 tonnes of cast steel were used to construct the Tower. The Tower
buildings occupy a total of 6040 sq yards.
When the Tower opened, 3000 customers took the first rides to the top. Tourists paid
6 old pence for admission, a further 6 old pence for a ride in the lifts to the top, and a
further 6 old pence for the circus.
Inside the Tower there is a circus, an aquarium, a ballroom, restaurants, a childrens play
area and amusements.
In 1998 a Walk of Faith glass floor panel was opened at the top of the Tower. Made up of
two sheets of laminated glass, it weighs half a tonne and is two inches thick. Visitors can
stand on the glass panel and look straight down 380 ft to the promenade.

Use the information to help you answer these questions.

In what year did the Tower celebrate its The circus in the base of the Tower first opened
1 centenary (100th birthday)? 7 to the public on 14 May 1894. Admission fee was
6 old pence. Before Britain introduced decimal
How many years and months did it take to currency in 1971 there were 240 old pence in
2 build the Tower? a pound.
a What fraction, in its simplest form, is 6 old
The Tower is painted continuously. It takes pence out of 240 old pence?
3 seven years to paint the Tower completely. b What is the equivalent value of 6 old pence in
How many times has it been painted since new pence?
it opened? Over 650 000 people visit the Tower every year.
8 The Tower is open every day except Christmas
The aquarium in the Tower opened 20 years day. Approximately how many people visit the
4 earlier than the Tower. What year did the Tower each day on average?
aquarium celebrate its 100th birthday?
a In January 2008, it cost 12 to visit the Eiffel
9 Tower and 9.50 to visit Blackpool Tower. The
The largest tank in the aquarium holds exchange rate in January 2008 was 1 = 1.35.
5 32 000 litres of water. There are
Which Tower was cheapest to visit and by how
approximately 4.5 litres to a gallon. How much (answer in pounds and pence)?
many gallons of water does the tank hold? b The Eiffel Tower is 325 m high. Blackpool Tower
is 519 ft high. 1 m 3.3 ft. How many times taller
The water in the tropical fish tanks is kept is the Eiffel Tower than the Blackpool Tower?
6 at 75 F. This rule is used to convert from
c The Eiffel Tower gets 6.7 million visitors a year.
degrees Fahrenheit to degrees How many times more popular is it with
Centigrade. tourists than the Blackpool Tower?
F C
Subtract 32 Divide by 9 Multiply by 5 d The Eiffel Tower celebrated its centenary in
1989. How many years before the Blackpool
Use this rule to convert 75F to C. Tower did it open?

20
FM Ch 1 Blackpool PB 8.3 30/4/08 17:14 Page 21

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Animals have not appeared in the Tower Circus An approximate

10 performances since 1990. 18 formula for how far
For how many years did animals appear in the you can see, D
circus? kilometres, when
you are m metres
The top of the Tower is 518 ft and 9 inches above above the ground is
11 the base. There are 12 inches in a foot and

2.54 cm in an inch. Calculate the height of the D = 13 m
Tower in metres. The coast of the
The Walk of Faith can withstand the weight of Isle of Man is 42 km
12 five baby elephants. One baby elephant weighs from Blackpool.
on average 240 kg. One adult human weighs on Can you see it from
average 86 kg. How many adults should be the observation
allowed on the Walk of Faith at any one time deck of the tower
(if they could fit)? which is 120 m
above the ground?
The Tower and buildings cost approximately
13 290 000 to construct. Today it is estimated that Show your working
the cost would be 230 million. By how many clearly.
times has the cost of building gone up since the
Tower was built?
The Tower lift makes about 75 trips up and down
14 each day. Each ascent and descent is
approximately 350 ft. There are 5280 ft in a mile.
In a year (assume 360 days) approximately how
many miles does the lift travel?
The Ballroom floor measures 36.58 m by 36.58 m.
15 It comprises 30 602 separate blocks of mahogany,
oak and walnut.
Assuming that every block is equal in area, what is
the area, in square centimetres, of each block?
Give your answer to the nearest square centimetre.
When it is lit up, the tower has 10 000 light bulbs
16 using an average of 15 watts per hour each. The
cost of electricity is 12p per kilowatt hour (1000
watts per hour). Calculate the approximate yearly
electricity bill for the lights assuming they are lit for
12 hours per day.
The circus ring when flooded can hold up to
17 190 000 litres of water to a depth of 140 cm.
(1 litre = 1000 cm3)
a How many cubic centimetres is 190 000 litres?
b Assuming that the circus ring is circular the
formula for working out the radius if you know
the volume, V, and the depth, d, is
V
r =
d
Work out the radius of the circus ring.
Give your answer in metres.

21
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 22

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

CHAPTER 2 Geometry and Measures 1

This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
How to identify alternate and How to use angles in parallel lines
corresponding angles The sum of the interior angles of
How to calculate the interior a triangle and a quadrilateral
and exterior angles of polygons The names for different sided
How to use proof in geometry polygons
How to classify quadrilaterals The symmetrical properties of
using their geometric properties quadrilaterals
How to draw constructions How to construct triangles from
using a ruler and compasses given information
How to solve algebraic equations

Alternate and corresponding angles

Look at the picture of the
railway. Can you work out
why the angles between the
arms of the signals and the
post are both the same?

45579

Example 2.1 Look at the diagram.

a Name pairs of angles that are alternate angles. f
b e
a
b Name pairs of angles that are corresponding h
d g
angles. c

e
a The alternate angles are b and g, and d and e. b
d
g
b The corresponding angles are a and e,
b and f, c and g, and d and h.

g d h
f c
e b
a

22
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 23

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Exercise 2A Copy and complete the sentences below.

r
6
q
a i j
b t
s
c d k l

e u v
f n
m
g w x
h p
o

a a and are corresponding angles.

b b and are corresponding angles.
c c and are corresponding angles.
d d and are corresponding angles.
e e and are alternate angles.
f f and are alternate angles.
g k and are corresponding angles.
h u and are corresponding angles.
i l and are corresponding angles.
j r and are corresponding angles.
k n and are alternate angles.
l s and are alternate angles.

Work out the measurement of the lettered angles in these diagrams.

a b c

75
85 42 d
70
a e
b c

d e f
l
118
g k 97
f
q
65 33 82
j p
m o
i h
n

23
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 24

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

6 a
Calculate x in each of these diagrams. You may need to set up and solve an equation.

b c
2x + 10
40 + x 2x + 10
3x 10 4x 20

120

d e

80 5x

2x + 60 80
4x 30
4x + 10

1 Interior angles in parallel lines

a and b are called interior angles:
a
a + b = 180 b

Calculate x in each of the following diagrams. You may need to set up

and solve an equation.

a b c

52 x
x
4x 5x
5x

d e
5x 9
8x + 15
2x + 14
3x

24
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 25

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

2 Drawing parallel lines using a ruler and a set-square

To draw a line parallel to the line AB C
6
to pass through the point C.

A B

Place the ruler and the set square Slide the set-square along the ruler until
on the line as shown: it touches C. Draw the line XY to pass
through C. Then XY is parallel to AB.
C C
X Y

A B A B

Now draw a line AB and points X, Y and A

Z as shown. Draw lines parallel to AB X
Y
which pass through the three points.

Z
B

Interior and exterior angles of polygons

Interior angles The angles inside a polygon are known as interior angles.
a
For a triangle, the sum of the interior angles is 180:
a + b + c = 180 b c

Example 2.2 Find the sum of the interior angles of a pentagon.

The diagram shows how a pentagon can be split into
three triangles from one of its vertices. The sum of the
interior angles for each triangle is 180.
So the sum of the interior angles of a pentagon
= 3 180 = 540
From this, we can deduce that each interior angle of 108
a regular pentagon is:
108 108
540 5 = 108
Remember: A regular polygon has equal sides and 108 108
equal angles.

25
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 26

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Exterior angles If we extend a side of a polygon, the angle formed outside the polygon is known as an
exterior angle.
In the diagram, a is an exterior angle of the quadrilateral.
At any vertex of a polygon, the interior angle plus the
exterior angle = 180 (angles on a straight line). a b
In the diagram, a + b = 180.
This is shown for the quadrilateral, but remember it is true for any polygon.

Example 2.3 On the diagram, all the sides of the pentagon have
been extended to show all the exterior angles.
If you imagine standing on a vertex and turning
through all the exterior angles on the pentagon, you
will have turned through 360.
This is true for all polygons. The sum of the exterior
angles for any polygon is 360.
For a regular pentagon, each exterior angle is
360 5 = 72

6 Exercise 2B a

b
Find the sum of the interior angles of: i a hexagon. ii an octagon by splitting
each polygon into triangles.
Copy and complete the table below. The pentagon has been done for you. You
should not draw the polygons.

Name of Number of sides Number of triangles Sum of interior angles

polygon for the polygon inside the polygon for the polygon
Triangle
Quadrilateral
Pentagon 5 3 540
Hexagon
Heptagon
Octagon
n-sided polygon

Calculate the measurement of the lettered angle in each of the following polygons.
a b c
110 110
160 c
a 50 140
130
140 80 30 45
b

Calculate the size of the interior angle for each of the following.
a A regular hexagon b A regular octagon c A regular decagon

26
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 27

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Calculate the size of the lettered angle in each of the following polygons.
a
100
b
55
c
c
6
58
60
95
a 135

b 83
72

Copy and complete the table below for regular polygons. The regular pentagon has
been done for you.
Regular polygon Number of sides Sum of exterior Size of each
angles exterior angle
Equilateral triangle
Square
Regular pentagon 5 360 72
Regular hexagon
Regular octagon
Regular decagon
Regular n-sided polygon

A regular dodecagon is a polygon with 12 equal angles.

a Calculate the sum of the interior angles.
b Work out the size of each interior angle.
c Work out the size of each exterior angle.

1 Calculate the value of x in each of the following polygons:

a b c
x 10
2x x x
x + 25 x x
2x 15 x x
80

2 The size of each interior angle in a regular polygon is 162. How many
sides does the polygon have?
3 The size of each exterior angle in a regular polygon is 20. How many
sides does the polygon have?
4 If you start at any vertex of a polygon, then follow each side around and back
to your starting position, then you will have made a complete turn of 360.
Use computer software such as Logo to demostrate this, and to explain why
360 is the sum of the exterior angles of any polygon.

27
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 28

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Geometric proof
The following two examples show you how to prove geometric statements. Proofs start
from basic geometric facts about parallel lines and polygons which are known to be true.
Algebra is used to combine the basic facts into more complex statements which must be
true as well.

Example 2.4 The sum of the angles of a triangle is 180.

To prove a + b + c = 180: a
b c
Draw a line parallel to one side of the triangle. Let x and y be
the other two angles formed on the line with a. Then x = b x y
(alternate angles), y = c (alternate angles) and a + x + y = 180 a
(angles on a line).
b c
So a + b + c = 180

Example 2.5 The exterior angle of a triangle is equal to the sum of the two
interior opposite angles. a
x is an exterior angle of the triangle. To prove a + b = x: x
b
Let the other interior angle of the triangle be c. Then
a + b + c = 180 (angles in a triangle) and x + c = 180 a
(angles on a straight line). c x
b
So a + b = x

6 Exercise 2C Write a proof to show that a + b = 90 in the

right-angled triangle.
a
b

Write a proof to show that the sum of the interior angles of a quadrilateral is 360.
(Hint: Divide the quadrilateral into two triangles.)

Write a proof to show that x + y = 180. x

y

Prove that the opposite angles of a parallelogram are equal.

(Hint: Draw a diagonal on the parallelogram and use alternate angles.)

1 Prove that the sum of the exterior angles

of a triangle is 360 (see diagram). a

2 Prove that the sum of the interior b

angles of a pentagon is 540.
c

28
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 29

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

The geometric properties of quadrilaterals

Read carefully and learn all the properties of the quadrilaterals below.

Square Four equal sides

Four right angles
Opposite sides parallel
Diagonals bisect each other at right angles
Four lines of symmetry
Rotational symmetry of order four

Rectangle Two pairs of equal sides

Four right angles
Opposite sides parallel
Diagonals bisect each other
Two lines of symmetry
Rotational symmetry of order two

Parallelogram Two pairs of equal sides

Two pairs of equal angles
Opposite sides parallel
Diagonals bisect each other
No lines of symmetry
Rotational symmetry of order two

Rhombus Four equal sides

Two pairs of equal angles
Opposite sides parallel
Diagonals bisect each other at right angles
Two lines of symmetry
Rotational symmetry of order two

Kite Two pairs of adjacent sides of equal length

One pair of equal angles
Diagonals intersect at right angles
One line of symmetry

Arrowhead or delta Two pairs of adjacent sides of equal length

One pair of equal angles
Diagonals intersect at right angles outside the
shape
One line of symmetry

Trapezium One pair of parallel sides

Some trapeziums have one line of symmetry

29
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 30

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Exercise 2D Copy the table below and put each of these quadrilaterals in the correct column:
square, rectangle, parallelogram, rhombus, kite, arrowhead, trapezium.

No lines of symmetry One line of symmetry Two lines of symmetry Four lines of symmetry

Copy the table below and put each of these quadrilaterals in the correct column:
square, rectangle, parallelogram, rhombus, kite, arrowhead, trapezium.

Rotational symmetry Rotational symmetry Rotational symmetry

of order one of order two of order four

A quadrilateral has four right angles and rotational symmetry of order two. What type
of quadrilateral is it?

A quadrilateral has rotational symmetry of order two and no lines of symmetry. What
type of quadrilateral is it?

Rachel says:
A quadrilateral with four equal
sides must be a square.

Is she right or wrong? Explain your answer.

Robert says:
A quadrilateral with rotational
symmetry of order two must be
a rectangle.
Is he right or wrong?
Explain your answer.

Sharon knows that a square is a special kind of rectangle (a rectangle with four
equal sides). Write down the names of other quadrilaterals that could also be given
to a square.

The three-by-two rectangle

shown is to be cut into
squares along its grid lines:

This can be done in two

different ways:
and

Three squares Six squares

Use squared paper to show the number of ways different sizes of rectangle can be
cut into squares.

30
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 31

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

1 The tree classification diagram below shows how to sort a set of triangles.
6
Start

A B
Choose a triangle

C D
Does
it have Yes Equilateral
three equal triangle A
sides?

No

Does Does
Isosceles Yes it have No it contain Yes Right-angled
triangle B two equal a right angle? triangle C
sides?

No

Scalene
triangle D

Draw a tree classification diagram to sort a given set of quadrilaterals.

Make a poster to show your diagram and display it in your classroom.
2 The instructions below are to draw the parallelogram shown.
REPEAT TWICE:
[FORWARD 10 120
TURN RIGHT 120
6
FORWARD 6
TURN RIGHT 60]
Write similar instructions to draw 10 60
different quadrilaterals. Choose your
own measurements for each one.
If you have access to a computer, START
you may be able to draw the shapes
by using programs such as Logo.

31
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 32

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Constructions
The following examples are four important geometric constructions. You have already met
the first two in Year 7. Carefully work through them yourself. They are useful because they
give exact measurements and are therefore used by architects and in design and technology.
You will need a sharp pencil, a straight edge (or ruler), compasses and a protractor. Draw
the initial diagram as large as you like. Leave all your construction lines on the diagrams.

Example 2.6 To construct the mid-point and the perpendicular bisector of the line AB:
Draw a line segment AB of any length. A B
Set compasses to any radius greater than half the
length of AB.
Draw two arcs with the centre at A, one above C
and one below AB.
With compasses set at the same radius, draw two
arcs with the centre at B, to intersect the first two
A B
arcs at C and D. X
Join C and D to intersect AB at X. X is the mid-
point of the line AB.
The line CD is the perpendicular bisector of the D
line AB.

Example 2.7 To construct the bisector of the angle ABC: A

Draw an angle () ABC of any size.
Set compasses to any radius. With the centre at
B, draw an arc to intersect BC at X and AB at Y.
With compasses set to any radius, draw two arcs B C
with the centres at X and Y, to intersect at Z. A
Join BZ.
BZ is the bisector of the angle ABC. Y
Z
Then ABZ = CBZ.

B C
X

Example 2.8 To construct the perpendicular from a point P to a P

line segment AB:
Set compasses to any suitable radius. Draw
arcs from P to intersect AB at X and Y. A B
With compasses set at the same radius, draw
arcs with the centres at X and Y to intersect at
Z below AB. P
Join PZ.
PZ is perpendicular to AB.
A B
X Y

32
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 33

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 2.9 To construct the perpendicular from a point Q on a X Y

line segment XY: Q
Set compasses to a radius that is less than half the
length of XY. With the centre at Q, draw two arcs C
on either side of Q to intersect XY at A and B.
Set compasses to a radius that is greater than half
the length of XY and, with the centres at A and B, X Y
draw arcs above and below XY to intersect at C Q
and D.
Join CD.
CD is the perpendicular from the point Q. D

You already know how to construct a triangle given two sides and the included angle
(abbreviated SAS) or two angles and the included side (ASA) or three sides (SSS). The
example below shows you how to construct a triangle given a right angle, the hypotenuse
(the longest side) and another side (RHS).

Example 2.10 To construct the right-angled triangle ABC: A

Draw line BC 4 cm long.

Use the method in Example 2.9 to 5 cm
construct the perpendicular from
B. (You will need to extend the
line BC.)
Set compasses to a radius of 5 cm. B C
4 cm
With centre at C, draw an arc to
intersect the perpendicular from B.
The intersection of the arc and the
perpendicular is A. A

B C

Exercise 2E Draw a line AB 10 cm in length. Using compasses, construct the perpendicular

bisector of the line. 6
Draw a line CD of any length. Using compasses, construct the perpendicular
bisector of the line.
Using a protractor, draw an angle of 80. Using compasses, construct the angle
bisector of this angle. Measure the two angles formed to check that they are both 40.
Using a protractor, draw an angle of 140. Using compasses, construct the angle
bisector of this angle. Measure the two angles formed to check that they are both 70.
Draw a line XY that is 8 cm in length.
a Construct the perpendicular bisector of XY.
b By measuring the length of the perpendicular bisector, draw a rhombus with
diagonals of length 8 cm and 5 cm.

33
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 34

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

6 Draw a circle of radius 6 cm and centre O. Draw a line AB

of any length across the circle, as in the diagram (AB is called
a chord). Construct the perpendicular from O to the line AB.
O
Extend the perpendicular to make a diameter of the circle.

A B
Construct each of the following right-angled triangles.
Remember to label all the sides.
a b c 6 cm

7 cm 8.8 cm

10 cm
6 cm 7.5 cm

A 10 m ladder leans against a wall with its foot on the ground 3 m from the wall.
a Use a scale of 1 cm to 1 m to construct an accurate scale drawing.
b Find how far up the wall the ladder actually reaches.
c Find the angle the ladder makes with the ground.

1 To construct an angle of 60: Y

Draw a line AB of any length. Set your compasses to a radius of
about 4 cm. With centre at A, draw a large arc to intersect the line at
X. Using the same radius and, with the centre at X, draw an arc to
intersect the first arc at Y. Join A and Y. Then YAX is 60.
Explain how you could use this construction to construct angles of A B
X
30 and 15.
A
2 To construct the inscribed circle of a triangle:
Draw a triangle ABC with sides of any length. Construct the angle
bisectors for each of the three angles. The three angle bisectors will
meet at a point O in the centre of the triangle. Using O as the
O
centre, draw a circle to touch the three sides of the triangle.
The circle is known as the inscribed circle of the triangle. B C

3 To construct the circumscribed circle of a triangle: A

Draw a triangle ABC with sides of any length. Construct the

perpendicular bisector for each of the three sides. The three
perpendicular bisectors will meet at a point O. Using O as the
centre, draw a circle to touch the three vertices of the triangle. O
The circle is known as the circumcircle of the triangle, and O is B C
known as the circumcentre.

34
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 35

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

5 I know the symmetrical properties of quadrilaterals.

I can construct triangles from given information.

6 I can use alternate and corresponding angles in parallel lines.

I can use the interior and exterior angle properties of polygons.
I can use proof in geometry.
I can solve problems using the geometrical properties of quadrilaterals.
I can draw constructions using a ruler and compasses.

1 2005 Paper 1
This shape has been made from two congruent isosceles triangles.
What is the size of angle p?
35
6
p Not drawn
accurately

35

2 2002 Paper 2 D C
The diagram shows a rectangle.
Work out the size of angle a. You must show a
your working.

65
35
A K B

3 2001 Paper 1
Look at the triangle drawn on the straight t
line PQ.

a Write x in terms of y.
y
b Now write x in terms of t and w. Q
w x
c Use your answers to a and b to show
that y = t + w.

35
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 36

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

4 2002 Paper 1

6 Draw two points 5 cm apart and label them C and D as below.

C D

Use a straight edge and compasses to draw all points that are the same distance from C as from D.
Leave in your construction lines.

5 2003 Paper 2
y
This pattern has rotation symmetry of order 6

a What is the size of angle w?

w 26
Show your working.

Not drawn
accurately

b Each quadrilateral in the pattern is made from two congruent

isosceles triangles. y
What is the size of angle y? Not drawn
Show your working. 13 accurately

36
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 37

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

CHAPTER 3 Statistics 1
This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
How to work out probabilities in Some basic ideas about chance
different situations and probability
How to use experimental How to collect data from a
probability to make predictions simple experiment
How to compare experimental How to record data in a table or
and theoretical probability chart
How to use fractions and
decimals

Probability
Look at the pictures. Which one is most likely to happen where you live today?

Many processes are said to be random. This means that the result is not predictable. So
we cannot say for certain that a particular event will happen. However, we can use
probability to decide how likely it is that different events will happen.
You may remember that the probability of an event is given by:
number of outcomes in the event
p(event) =
total number of possible outcomes

Example 3.1 What is the probability of rolling a dice and obtaining a prime number?

There are 6 possible outcomes: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 and 2, 3 and 5 are prime numbers,

so there are 3 possible prime numbers to roll.
So, p(prime) = 36 = 12

Example 3.2 A dice is rolled 60 times and a 6 turns up 5 times. Is the dice biased?
p(6) = 16 so we would expect to see 60 16 = 10 sixes
So, there are half the number of expected sixes, suggesting that the dice is biased.

37
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 38

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

6 Exercise 3A Bag A contains 10 red marbles, 5 blue marbles

and 5 green marbles. Bag B contains 8 red
marbles, 2 blue marbles and no green marbles.
Bag A Bag B

A girl wants to pick a marble at random from a

bag. Which bag should she choose to have the
better chance of:
a a red marble? b a blue marble? c a green marble?
Explain your answers.

I roll a dice 30 times. How many times should I expect to see:

a the number 5? b an even number? c a number less than 5?

A pack of cards is shuffled and one drawn at random. This happens 60 times.
How many times would you expect to see:
a a red card? b a club?
c an Ace? d either a Queen or a King?

If I toss a fair coin 100 times, how many heads should I expect to see?

a Write down the four different results after flipping a 2p coin and a 10p coin.
b If you flipped the two coins 100 times, how many times would you expect to see:
i two heads? ii two tails? iii a head and a tail?

In Mr Speeds class there are 16 boys and 12 girls. He always chooses at random a
pupil to give out the books. He takes this class 72 times in the year and every pupil is
always there.
How many times would you expect that the person giving out the books is:
a a boy? b a girl?

7 A coin is flipped 60 times. It lands on heads 36 times.

Do you think that the coin is biased? Explain your answer.

The probability of winning a major prize on a national lottery is 0.000 000 2.

Ben had a go on this lottery twice a week and every week for 60 years.
a How many times could he expect to win this lottery?
b How long should he live, going on this lottery twice a week, in order to expect
having won once?

The probability of winning a small prize on a national lottery is 0.0095.

Fiya had a go on this lottery twice a week, every week.
How many times could she expect to win a small prize on this lottery in a year?

6 Carry out a survey by asking many people in your class to give you five
different numbers between 1 and 20.
Record the results and write a brief report to say whether you think that each
number has the same chance of being chosen.

38
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 39

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Probability scales
Probabilities can be written as either fractions or decimals. They always take values from
0 to 1 inclusive. The probability of an event can be shown on the probability scale:

0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1

Impossible Evens Certain

For example, before we go outside, we might think about rain. There are only two
possible events: raining, and not raining. The probabilities of all the possible events must
add up to 1. So if the probability of it raining is p, then the probability of it not raining is
1 p.
The weather is very complex. We could look out of the window and guess that the
probability of it raining is 0.2. A weather service will collect lots of data, and might
forecast the probability as 0.3.
In simpler situations, we can give the probabilities exactly. For example, the event of
drawing a diamond from a pack of playing cards consists of 13 of the 52 possible
13
outcomes. So the probability of drawing a diamond is 52 = 14 = 0.25. The probability of
39
52 = 0.75).
not drawing a diamond is 1 0.25 = 0.75 (or

Example 3.3 The probability that a woman washes her car on

Sunday is 0.7. What is the probability that she does
not wash her car on Sunday?
These two events are opposites of each other, so the
probabilities add up to 1. The probability that she
does not wash her car is 1 0.7 = 0.3.

Example 3.4 A girl plays a game of tennis. The probability that she
wins is 23. What is the probability that she loses?
The probability of not winning (losing) is 1 23 = 13.

Example 3.5 Here are the probabilities of different events happening. What are the probabilities
of these events not happening?
1 3 3
a 0.4 b 0.8 c 0.75 d 0.16 e
4 f
5 g
8

The probabilities of the events not happening are:

a 1 0.4 = 0.6 b 1 0.8 = 0.2 c 1 0.75 = 0.25
1
d 1 0.16 = 0.84 e 1
4 = 34 f 1 35 = 25 g 1 38 = 58

39
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 40

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 3.6 A number of discs marked 1, 2, 3 and 4 are placed

in a bag. The probabilities of randomly drawing
out discs marked with a particular number are
given as:
p(1) = 0.2 p(2) = 0.3 p(3) = 0.25
What is the probability of drawing a disc marked: a 1, 2 or 3 b 4
a The probability of drawing a disc marked 1, 2 or 3 is
0.2 + 0.3 + 0.25 = 0.75
b The probability of drawing a disc marked 4 is
1 0.75 = 0.25

6 Exercise 3B Here is a probability scale:

A B C D

0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1

The probabilities of events A, B, C and D happening are shown on the scale. Copy
the scale and mark on it the probabilities of A, B, C and D not happening.

Copy and complete the table.

Event Probability of event Probability of event

occurring (p) not occurring (1 p)
1
A
4
1
B
3
3
C
4
9
D
10
2
E
15
7
F
8
7
G
9

A card is chosen at random from a pack of 52 playing cards. Calculate the

probability that it is:
a not an ace. b not a diamond.
c not a picture card. d not the six of hearts.

In a city taxi fleet there are 25 black cabs, 8 yellow cabs and 7 blue cabs.
Mr Adams does not like riding in a yellow taxi cab.
a What is the probability that the first cab to come along for Mr Adams is not yellow?
b Mr Adams travels by taxi approximately 100 times a year. How many of these
times would you expect him to travel in a taxi that is:
i not yellow? ii blue? iii not black?

40
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 41

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

A bag contains 32 counters that are either black or white. The probability that a
counter is black is 14 .
How many white counters are in the bag? Explain how you worked it out.
6
A bag contains many counters that are red, blue, green or yellow. The probabilities of
randomly drawing out a counter of a particular colour are given as:
p(red) = 0.4
p(blue) = 0.15
p(green) = 0.3
Calculate the probability that a counter drawn out is:
a red or blue.
b red, blue or green.
c yellow.

In a game there are three types of prize: jackpot, runners-up and consolation. The
1 1
probability of winning the jackpot is 100 , the probability of a runners-up prize is 10 ,
1
and the probability of a consolation prize is 2.
a Calculate the probability of winning a prize.
b Calculate the probability of not winning a prize.
c Which event is more likely to happen: winning a prize or not winning a prize?
d After many games the jackpot had been won three times. How many games
would you expect to have been played?

Design a spreadsheet to convert the probabilities of events happening into

the probabilities that they do not happen.

Mutually exclusive events

You have a dice and are trying to throw numbers less
than 4, but you are also looking for even numbers.
Which number is common to both events?
When two events overlap like this, we say that the
events are not mutually exclusive. This means they
can both happen at once.
When you repeatedly throw a dice like this, you are
conducting an experiment. Each throw is called a trial.

41
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 42

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 3.7

The woman shown is choosing fruit. Here is a list of events:

Event A: She chooses strawberries.
Event B: She chooses red fruit.
Event C: She chooses green apples.
Event D: She chooses red apples.
Event E: She chooses oranges.
Event F: She chooses bananas.
Event G: She chooses fruit with thick skins that need peeling.
She chooses one item only. State whether each of the following pairs of events is
mutually exclusive or not.
a A and B b A and E c B and C d B and D e E and F f E and G
a Strawberries are red fruit, so the events are not mutually exclusive.
b Strawberries are not oranges, so the events are mutually exclusive.
c Green apples are not red fruit, so the events are mutually exclusive.
d Red apples are red fruit, so the events are not mutually exclusive.
e Oranges are not bananas, so the events are mutually exclusive.
f Oranges are fruits with thick skins that need peeling, so the events are not
mutually exclusive.

6 Exercise 3C A number square contains the numbers from 1 to 100. A number is chosen from the
number square. Here is a list
of events: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Event A: The number chosen is 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
greater than 50.
Event B: The number chosen is less 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
than 10.
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
Event C: The number chosen is a
square number (1, 4, 9, 16, ). 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Event D: The number chosen is a
multiple of 5 (5, 10, 15, 20, ). 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
Event E: The number chosen has at 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70
least one 6 in it.
Event F: The number chosen is a 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
factor of 100 (1, 2, 4, 5, 10, ).
Event G: The number chosen is a 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90
triangle number (1, 3, 6, 10, ). 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100

42
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 43

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

State whether each of the following pairs of events is mutually exclusive or not.
a A and B
e B and F
b A and C
f C and F
c B and C
g C and G
d C and D
h D and E
6
i D and G j E and F k E and G l F and G

A till contains lots of 1p, 2p, 5p, 10p, 20p, 50p, 1 and 2 coins.
A woman is given two coins in her change. List all the different amounts of money
that she could have received in her change.

Look back at Example 3.7. On one particular day the woman decides to buy two
types of fruit from bananas, apples, oranges or strawberries. List all the possible
combinations that she could choose.

Two fair spinners are spun.

a Complete the table to show the different pairs of scores.

Spinner 1 Spinner 2 Total score

+2 0 2
+2 1 1

b What is the most likely score?

What is the probability of:
c a score of 2? d a positive score? e a negative score?

A sampling bottle contains 40 different coloured beads.

(A sampling bottle is a plastic bottle in which only one
bead can be seen at a time.)
7
a After 20 trials a boy has seen 12 black beads and 8 white
beads. Does this mean that there are only black and
white beads in the bottle? Explain your answer.
b The boy is told that there are 20 black beads,
15 white beads and 5 red beads in the bottle. State
which of the following events are mutually exclusive.
i Seeing a black bead and seeing a white bead
ii Seeing a black bead and seeing a bead that is not white
iii Seeing a black bead and seeing a bead that is not black
iv Seeing any colour bead and seeing a red bead

Imagine a horse race between two horses (called A and B). They could finish
the race in two different ways, AB or BA.
Now look at a three-horse race. How many ways can they finish the race?
Extend this problem to four horses, and so on. Put your results into a table.
See if you can work out a pattern to predict how many different ways a
10-horse race could finish.
When you have finished this, you can explore what the factorial ! button does
on a calculator (you may be able to relate this to the horse problem).

43
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 44

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Calculating probabilities
Look at the spinners. Which one
is more likely to land on red?

Remember:
number of outcomes in the event
p(event) =
total number of possible outcomes
Landing on red is an event. The sectors on the spinners are the possible outcomes.
Sometimes you will look at more than one event happening at the same time. Diagrams
called sample spaces will help you do this. A sample space contains all the possible
outcomes of the combined experiment. Look at the sample space for a coin and a dice:

1 2 3 4 5 6
Head H, 1 H, 2 H, 3 H, 4 H, 5 H, 6
Tail T, 1 T, 2 T, 3 T, 4 T, 5 T, 6

You can now work out the probability of throwing both a head and a 6.

Example 3.8 An ice-cream man sells 10 different flavours of

ice cream. A girl picks a tub at random (without
looking). What is the probability that the girl
picks her favourite flavour?
She has only one favourite, so the probability
1 ICE CR
that she picks that one out of 10 flavours is 10
. EAM
EAM
ICE CR
Example 3.9 Toni has been shopping and is carrying two bags. The first bag
contains tins of beans and spaghetti. The second bag contains
white and brown bread. One item is picked from each bag.
List all the combinations that could be chosen.
The combinations are:
Beans and white bread
Spaghetti and white bread
AS
Beans and brown bread D

Spaghetti and brown bread

6 Exercise 3D A set of cards is numbered from 1 to 200. One card is picked at random. Give the
probability that it:
a is even. b has a 7 on it. c has a 3 on it.
d is a prime number. e is a multiple of 6. f is a square number.
g is less than 110. h is a factor of 180.

Two pupils are chosen from a class with an equal number of boys and girls.
a Write down the four possible boy/girl combinations that could be chosen.
b Jo says that the probability of choosing two boys is 13. Explain why he is wrong.

44
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 45

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

A bag contains apples, bananas and pears. Two fruits are chosen at random. List the
possible outcomes.
6
Jacket potatoes are sold either plain, with cheese or with beans. Clyde and Delroy
each buy a jacket potato.
a Copy and complete the table: b Give the probability of:

Clyde Delroy i Clyde choosing plain.

ii Delroy choosing plain.
plain plain
iii Both choosing plain.
plain cheese iv Clyde choosing plain and
Delroy choosing beans.
v Clyde choosing beans and
Delroy choosing cheese.
vi Both choosing the same.
vii Both not choosing plain.
viii Both choosing different.

Two dice are rolled and the scores are added together. Copy and complete the
sample space of scores.

1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3
2 3

a What is the most likely total?

b Give the probability that the total is:
i 4 ii 5 iii 1
iv 12 v less than 7
vi less than or equal to 7 vii greater than or equal to 10
viii even ix 6 or 8

Make up your own question using two different spinners as follows. Draw the
spinners and put different numbers on each section. Now make a sample space
diagram and write three of your own questions followed by the answers.

45
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 46

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Experimental probability
Will the train be
late again today? Look at the picture. How could you estimate
the probability that a train will be late?

The train arriving late is an event. You could keep a record of the number of times that the
train arrives late and not late over a period of 10 days. You could then use the results of
these trials to estimate the probability that the train will be late in future. This is the
experimental probability of the event:
number of trials in which event occurred
Experimental probability =
total number of trials carried out
The arrival of a train is a very complex process. For simpler processes (such as throwing a
pair of dice) you can first calculate the theoretical probability of an event (such as
throwing 7). You have already met this:
number of outcomes in the event
Theoretical probability =
total number of possible outcomes

So you can make predictions: you know what to expect when you carry out the
experiment. You can then compare the experimental probability of an event with the
theoretical probability.

Example 3.10 An electrician wants to estimate the probability that a new light bulb lasts less than
1 month. He fits 20 new bulbs, and 3 of them fail within 1 month.
a What is his estimate of the probability that a new light bulb will fail within 1 month?
b The manufacturer of the bulbs claims that 1 in 10 of all bulbs produced fail
within 1 month. Do you think the electrician will agree with him?

a 3 out of 20 bulbs fail, so his experimental probability is 3 .

20
2 3
b 1 in 10 or
20 is less than 3 in 20 or 20 , so the electrician will not agree with the

manufacturer.

Example 3.11 A dentist keeps a record of the number of fillings she gives her patients over 2 weeks.
Here are her results:
Number of fillings None 1 More than 1
Number of patients 80 54 16

Estimate the probability that a patient did not need a filling (there are 150 records
altogether).
80 = .
The experimental probability is 8
150 15

46
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:48 Page 47

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 3.12 A company manufactures items for computers. The number of faulty items is recorded
as shown below.

Number of items produced Number of faulty items Experimental probability

100 8 0.08
200 20
500 45
1000 82

a Copy and complete the table.

b Which is the best estimate of the probability of an item being faulty?
Explain your answer.
a
Number of items produced Number of faulty items Experimental probability
100 8 0.08
200 20 0.1
500 45 0.09
1000 82 0.082

b The last result (0.082), as the experiment is based on more results.

Example 3.13 Two dice are thrown by three players. Each player has a rule which gains them a
point whenever it is satisfied. The rules are:
Rule 1: a total of 7
Rule 2: a total of more than 8
Rule 3: a double
a Calculate the theoretical probability of obtaining a point using each rule.
b Test these predictions for a game of just 12 throws, and examine the results.

a First dice
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 The theoretical probabilities are:
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 for rule 1: 6

36 = 1

6 = 0.16
Second
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 for rule 2: 10
= 5
= 0.27
dice 36 18
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 for rule 3: 6
= 1
= 0.16
36 6
5 6 7 8 9 10 11
6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Therefore you would expect rules 1 and 3 to give the same number of points, and
rule 2 to give more points than rules 1 and 3.

47
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:49 Page 48

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 3.13 b Here are some experimental results from 12 throws:

continued Rule 1 Rule 2 Rule 3
2 4 3
The experimental probabilities are:
2
for rule 1: 12
= 16 = 0.16
4 1
for rule 2:
12 = 3 = 0.3

3 1
for rule 3:
12 = 4 = 0.25

The experimental probabilities are not all the same as the theoretical probabilities.
Rules 2 and 3 gave a different number of points from those expected. The most likely
reason is that there were not enough trials. A less likely reason is that the dice were
biased.

6 Exercise 3E A boy decides to carry out an experiment to estimate the probability of a drawing pin
landing with the pin pointing up. He drops 50 drawing pins and records the result.
He then repeats the experiment several times. Here are his results:

Number of drawing pins Number pointing up

50 32
100 72
150 106
200 139

a From the results, would you say that there is a greater chance of a drawing pin
landing point up or point down? Explain your answer.
b Which result is the most reliable, and why?
c From these data, how could the boy estimate the probability of a drawing pin
landing point up?
d How could he improve the experiment?
e If you spilt a box of 500 drawing pins on the floor, how many would you expect
to land point up?

a Draw a table showing all the possible combinations when you roll two dice, one
blue and one red.
b You roll two dice in a typical game of Monopoly about 100 times. Use your
table to predict how many times you would expect to roll:
i a double 6. ii a double.
iii a total of 7. iv a total more than 8.

Two dice are thrown by three players. Each player has a rule which gains them a
point whenever it is satisfied. The rules are as follows.
Rule 1: the product is odd
Rule 2: the sum is even
Rule 3: the difference is 1
a Calculate the theoretical probability of obtaining a point using each rule.
b Test the predictions with a game of 30 throws, and examine the results.

48
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:49 Page 49

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Some pupils rolled three fair dice.

They recorded how many times the numbers on
the dice were the same.
7
Results
Name Number of throws
All different Two the same All the same
Ali 50 33 15 2
Mark 150 86 61 3
Kate 30 15 14 1
Rashid 100 53 43 4

a Who is the pupil whose data are most likely to give the best estimate of the
probability of getting each result? Explain your answer.
b This table shows the pupils results altogether.

Results
Number of throws
All different Two the same All the same
330 187 133 10

Use these data to estimate the probability of throwing numbers that are all
different.
c The theoretical probability of each result is shown below.

All different Two the same All the same

17
Probability 30 0.41 0.03

Use these probabilities to calculate, for 330 throws, how many times you would
theoretically expect to get each result.
d Explain why the pupils results are not the same as the theoretical results.
e Ria says to her daughter, If you roll three dice 100 times, you will get the same
three numbers 18 times.
Explain why she is wrong to say this.

Decide on an experiment of your own. You should choose a process that has a few
clearly different outcomes, and that you can observe lots of times. Write a report of how
you would carry out the experiment and how you would record your results.
6

49
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:49 Page 50

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

6 I can identify all the outcomes from two events.

I can use tables to show the outcomes.
I understand what is meant by mutually exclusive.
I can use the fact that the total of mutually exclusive events in a situation is 1.

7 I know how to identify bias in an experiment.

I know how to compare outcomes of experiments.

1 2000 Paper 1

6 There are some cubes in a bag.

The cubes are either red (R) or
If you take a cube at random out of the bag,
1
the probability that it will be red is 5
black (B). The teacher says:

a What is the probability that the cube will be black?

b A pupil takes one cube out of the bag. It is red.

What is the smallest number of black cubes
there could be in the bag?

c Then the pupil takes another cube out of the bag.

It is also red.
From this new information, what is the smallest number of black cubes there could be in the bag?

d A different bag has blue (B), green (G) and yellow (Y) cubes in it. There is at least one of
each of the three colours.

The teacher says: If you take a cube at random out of the bag,
the probability that it will be green is 35

There are 20 cubes in the bag.

What is the greatest number of yellow cubes there could be in the bag? Show your working.

2 2005 Paper 2
A spinner has the numbers 1 to 4 on it.
The probability of spinning a number 4 is 0.1.
The probability of spinning a number 1 is 0.6.
The probability of spinning a number 2 is the same as the probability of spinning a number 3.
Calculate the probability of spinning a number 3.

50
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:49 Page 51

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

3 2007 Paper 1
A teacher has some coins in his pocket.
He is going to take one of the coins at random.
7
He says:
There are more than four coins in my pocket.
The total value of the coins is 25p.
The probability that I will take a 1p coin is 14.

List all the coins that must be in his pocket.

4 2007 Paper 2
A computer is going to choose a letter at random from an English book.
The table shows the probabilities of the computer choosing each vowel.

Vowel A E I O U

Probability 0.08 0.13 0.07 0.08 0.03

What is the probability that it will not choose a vowel?

5 2007 Paper 2
Class 9A Class 9B
The table shows the number of boys and girls in two
different classes. Boys 13 12

A teacher is going to choose a pupil at random from each Girls 15 14

of these classes.
In which class is she more likely to choose a boy?
You must show your working.

51
FM Ch 3 Fairground PB 8.3 30/4/08 17:16 Page 52

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Functional Maths

Fun in the fairground

The fair has come to town.

Hoopla Hook a duck

You can buy five hoops for 1.25. This is a game where plastic ducks float around a
central stall. They all have numbers stuck to their
You win a prize by throwing a hoop over that prize,
underside which cannot be seen until hooked up on
but it must also go over the base that the prize is
a stick and presented to the stall holder.
standing on!
In the game, if the number under the duck is a:
Ben spent some time watching people have a go at
1 you win a lollipop 2 you win a yo-yo
this stall and started to count how many goes they
5 you win a cuddly toy
had and how many times someone won.
Each time a duck is hooked, it is replaced in the water.
The table below shows his results.
Cindy, the stall holder, set up the stall one week with:
Prize Number of throws Number of wins 45 plastic ducks
Watch 320 1 Only one of which had the number 5 underneath
Nine had the number 2 underneath
10 note 240 4
All the rest had a number 1 underneath
1 coin 80 2
Cindy charged 40p for one stick, to hook up just
one duck.

Use the information on Hoopla to answer these questions.

From the results shown, what is the probability On a Saturday afternoon, the stall would expect
1 of someone aiming for and winning a: 4 about 500 people to buy a set of hoops.
a 1 coin? Assume that the throws would have been
aimed at the various prizes in the same
b 10 note?
proportion as Ben observed.
c watch? a How many of each prize would the stall
expect to have to give away?
What would you say is the chance of someone
2 winning a prize with: b How much income would be generated
from the 500 people?
a one hoop? c If the watches cost 18, how much profit
b five hoops? would the stall expect to make on a
Saturday afternoon?
After watching this, Ben decided to try for a
3 10 note. How many sets of five hoops would someone
5 have to use to give themselves a good
He bought 25 hoops and all his throws were
chance of expecting to win:
aimed at the 10 note.
a 1 coin?
a How much did this cost him?
b 10 note?
b What is his probability of winning a 10 note?
c watch?

52
FM Ch 3 Fairground PB 8.3 30/4/08 17:16 Page 53

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Use the information on Hook a duck to answer these questions.

What is the probability of winning anything other than

6 a lollipop?

Tom wanted his sister, Julie, to win a yo-yo.

7
a How many ducks should Julie hook to expect to have
picked up at least one with a number 2 underneath?
b How much will it cost Tom to pay for the number of
ducks hooked to expect Julie to win a yo-yo?

Before lunch on Sunday, Cindy took 100 from the stall.

8
a How many ducks had been hooked that morning?
b How many cuddly toys would you expect Cindy to have
given away that morning?
c How many yo-yos would you expect Cindy to have
given away that morning?

Cindy bought in the cuddly toys for 4 each and the yo-yos
9 for 50p each. She gets the lollipops in a jar of 100 for 4.
Cindy expects to take 250 on a Friday night.
a How many ducks will she expect to be hooked
that night?
b How many lollipops will she expect to give away
that evening?
c How many yo-yos will she expect to give away
that evening?
d How many cuddly toys will she expect to give away that
evening?
e What will be the value of all the prizes she expects to
give away that night?

In the first week Cindy expects to have 1500 ducks

10 hooked.
Cindy expects to take 250 on a Friday night.
a How many of each prize would Cindy expect to give
away?
b What profit would Cindy expect to make in that first
week?

53
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:49 Page 54

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

CHAPTER 4 Number 2
This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
More about working with Some common fractions,
fractions, decimals and decimals and percentages that
percentages are equal
How to calculate percentage How to add and subtract simple
increase and decrease fractions with a common
How to compare proportions denominator
using fractions and decimals How to calculate fractions and
percentages of quantities

Fractions and decimals

These diagrams show shapes with various fractions of them shaded. Can you write them
as a decimal, a fraction and a percentage?

Example 4.1 Write the following decimals as fractions.

a 0.65 b 0.475
65 13 475
a 0.65 = 100
=
20 (cancel by 5) b 0.475 =
1000 = 19
(cancel by 25)
40

Example 4.2 Write the following fractions as decimals.

2 13 4
a
5 b
16 c
7

2
a
5 = 0.4 (you should know this)
13
b
16= 13 16 = 0.8125 (this is a terminating decimal because it ends without
repeating itself)

4
c
7 = 4 7 = 0.571428 571 = 0.571428 (this is a recurring decimal because
the six digits 5, 7, 1, 4, 2, 8 repeat infinitely; a recurring decimal is shown by
the dots over the first and last recurring digits)

54
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:49 Page 55

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Exercise 4A Write the following decimals as fractions with a denominator of 10, 100 or 1000 and
then cancel to their simplest form if possible. 6
a 0.24 b 0.45 c 0.125 d 0.348
e 0.8 f 0.555 g 0.55 h 0.875

Without using a calculator, work out the value of these fractions as decimals.
3 3 13 18
a 5 b 8 c 20 d 25

Use a calculator to work out, and then write down, the following terminating decimals.
1 1 1 1
a 2 b 4 c 5 d 8
1 1 1 1
e 10 f 16 g 20 h 25
1 1
i 40 j 50

Use a calculator to work out, and then write down, the following recurring decimals.
1 1 1 1
a 3 b 6 c 7 d 9
1 1 1 1
e 11 f 12 g 13 h 14
1 1
i 15 j 18

By looking at the denominators of the fractions in Questions 3 and 4, predict if the

following fractions will be terminating or recurring decimals (and then work them
out to see if you were correct).
2 4 3 2
a 3 b 5 c 7 d 9
3 5 7 11
e 16 f 8 g 12 h 14
4 39
i 15 j 50

Give the larger of these pairs of fractions.

7 1 5 11 7 4 2 16
a 20 and 3 b 9 and 20 c 8 and 5 d 3 and 25

Write the following lists of fractions in increasing order of size.

2 13 6 1 5 3 17 2
a 9 , 50 , 25 and 4 b 8 , 5 , 25 and 3

a Use a calculator to work out 19 , 29 , 3

9 and 4
9 as recurring decimals.
5 6 7 8
b Write down 9, 9, 9 and 9 as recurring decimals.

Work out the sevenths (that is, 71 , 27 , 37 , 47 , 57 , 67 ) as recurring decimals. Describe any
patterns that you can see in the digits. 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Work out the elevenths (that is, 11 , 11 , 11 , 11 , 11 , 11 , 11 , 11 , 11 , 11 ) as recurring
decimals. Describe any patterns that you can see in the digits.

1 Describe a rule for the denominator of a terminating decimal.

2 Describe a rule for the denominator of a recurring decimal.

55
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:49 Page 56

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Adding and subtracting fractions

All of the grids below contain 100 squares. Some of the squares have been shaded in. The
fraction shaded is shown below the square in its lowest terms. Use the diagrams to work
out 1 ( 51 + 20
7
+ 11 1
25 + 25 ).

1 7 11 1
5 20 25 25

Example 4.3 Work out:

2
a
5 + 14 b 2

3 + 27 c 1

3 + 56 + 342
a The common denominator is 20, as this is the lowest common multiple of 4 and
5, hence 25 + 14 =
8 5
13
20 + 20 = 20

b The common denominator is 21, hence 23 + 27 = 14 6

+
21
20
21 = 21

c The common denominator is 12, hence 13 + 56 + 34 =

4 10 9 23 11
12 + 12 + 12 = 12 = 112

Note that the last answer is a top-heavy fraction, and so should be written as a
mixed number.

Example 4.4 Work out:

2
a
3 14 b 5

6 4

9

a The common denominator is 12, so 23 14 = 8

12 3
12 = 5

12

b The common denominator is 18, so 56 4

9 = 15

18 8

18 = 7
18

Exercise 4B Find the lowest common multiple of the following pairs of numbers.
a 3, 4 b 5, 6 c 3, 5 d 2, 3
e 4, 5 f 2, 4 g 6, 9 h 4, 6

6 Convert the following fractions to equivalent fractions with a common denominator.

Then work out the answer to the addition or subtraction. Cancel down or write as a
mixed number if appropriate.
2 1 2 1
a 3 + 4 b 5 + 6 c 2 13 + 2
5 d 2 13 + 1 21
e 4 51 + 134 f 121 + 165 g 3 65 + 119 h 1 16 + 2 78
1 1 2 1
i 3 4 j 5 6 k 2 25 131 l 3 12 1 13
m 3 25 143 n 3 12 165 o 3 56 191 p 2 56 1 78

56
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:49 Page 57

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Work out the following fraction additions and subtractions.

a
e
3
4
5
+

9
14
3
b
f
2
9
11
+

4
21
9
c
g
1
12
17
+

2
21
15
d
h
7
18
19
+

11
24
11
6
56 70 28 38 18 32 25 15

i 111 7
18 + 124 j 1
3 21 6
1 35

Convert the following fractions to equivalent fractions with a common denominator.

Then work out the answers. Cancel down or write as mixed numbers if appropriate.
a 131 7
8 b 2 23 + 4
7 c 123 + 2 14 d 3 23 115

Copy the diagram shown. Shade in the following

1 5 1 1 1
fractions without overlapping: 12 , 24 , 8 , 4 and 6 .

Write down the answer, in its simplest form, to

1 5
1 ( 12 + 24 + 18 + 14 + 16 ).

A rectangle measures 3 59 cm by 7 56 cm. Calculate its perimeter.

A knife is 13 23 cm long in total. The handle is 6 34 cm. How long is the blade?
1323 cm

634 cm

The ancient Egyptians only used unit

fractions, that is fractions with a numerator
of 1. So they would write 58 as 12 + 18.
1 Write the following as the 1 1
sum of two unit fractions. + 8
3 3 7 2
2
a
8 b
4 c
12 d
3

2 Write the following as the

sum of three unit fractions.
7 5 5 23
a
8 b
6 c
8 d
24

Multiplying and dividing fractions

You can use grids to work out fractions of quantities.
3
This grid shows that 4 of 24 is equal to 18:

2
This grid shows that 3 of 24 is equal to 16:

57
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:49 Page 58

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

3
Example 4.5 Use this grid to work out 10
of 30.

3

10 of 30 = 9

Example 4.6 Work out:

a 3

4 of 28 b 5 2

3 c 2

3 6
a 1

4 of 28 = 7, so 3

4 of 28 = 3 7 = 21
2
b 5 2

3 = 5
3 = 10

3 = 313
2 2 2 1
c
3 6 = 3
6 =

18 =
9

Exercise 4C Use any method to work out each of these.

1 3 1 3
a 8 of 32 b 8 of 32 c 4 of 32 d 4 of 32
1 3 2 5
e 5 of 25 f 5 of 25 g 3 of 45 h 6 of 120

Work out the following.

5 3 2 5
a 8 of 32 b 16 of 64 kg c 3 of 45 d 6 of 240 cm
6 9 3 3
e 7 of 28 cm f 10 of 40 grams g 8 of 72 h 4 of 48 km

6 Work out the following. Cancel down or write as mixed numbers if appropriate.
a 5 3
4 b 7 4
5 c 9 2
3 d 4 7
8

e 8 9
10 f 6 3
7 g 9 5
6 h 10 3
4

Work out the following.

3 4 2 5
a 4 5 b 5 8 c 3 6 d 9 7
2 8 3 7
e 7 5 f 9 2 g 5 7 h 8 6

Copy and complete the following sentence.

Multiplying by a fraction between 0 and 1 makes the answer

Copy and complete the following sentence.

Dividing a fraction between 0 and 1 by a whole number makes the answer

58
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:49 Page 59

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Put these in order of size smallest to biggest.

a 24 58 36 14 35 27
6
3 1 2
b
8 4
4 3
7 5

Percentages

Example 4.7 Without using a calculator, find:

a 18 as a percentage of 25. b 39 as a percentage of 300.
18 72
a Write as a fraction .
25 Multiply the top and bottom by 4, which gives 100 .
So 18
is 72% of 25.
39 13
b Write as a fraction 300 .
Cancel the top and bottom by 3, which gives 100 .
So 39
is 13% of 300.

Example 4.8 a What percentage of 80 is 38? b What percentage of 64 is 14?

a Write as a fraction 38
. Divide through to give the decimal 0.475. Then multiply
80
by 100 to give 47 2 %. Or, simply multiply 38
1 by 100.
80

b Write as a fraction 14
. Divide through to give the decimal 0.218 75. Then
64
multiply by 100 giving 22% (rounded off from 21.875). Or, simply multiply 14

64
by 100.

Example 4.9 Ashram scored 39 out of 50 in a Physics test, 56 out of 70 in a Chemistry test and
69 out of 90 in a Biology test. In which science did he do best?
Convert each mark to a percentage:
Physics = 78%
Chemistry = 80%
Biology = 77% (rounded off)
So Chemistry was the best mark.

Exercise 4D Without using a calculator, express the following as percentages.

a 32 out of 50 b 17 out of 20 c 24 out of 40 d 16 out of 25 6
e 122 out of 200 f 93 out of 300 g 640 out of 1000 h 18 out of 25

In each of the following, use a calculator to express the first number as a percentage
of the second (round off to the nearest percent if necessary).
a 33, 60 b 18, 80 c 25, 75 d 26, 65
e 56, 120 f 84, 150 g 62, 350 h 48, 129

59
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:49 Page 60

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

6 In the National Curriculum test, Trevor scored 39 out of 60 in Maths, 42 out of 70 in

English and 54 out of 80 in Science. Convert all these scores to a percentage. In
which test did Trevor do best?

In a Maths exam worth 80 marks, 11 marks are allocated to Number, 34 marks are
allocated to Algebra, 23 marks are allocated to Geometry and 12 marks are allocated
to Statistics. Work out the percentage allocated to each topic (round the answers off
to the nearest percent) and add these up. Why is the total more than 100%?

A table costs a carpenter 120 to make. He sells it for 192.

a How much profit did he make?
b What percentage of the cost price was the profit?

A dealer buys a painting for 5500. He sells it at a loss for 5000.

a How much did he lose?
b What percentage of the original price was the loss?

Mr Wilson pays 60 a month to cover his electricity, gas and oil bills. Electricity costs
24, gas costs 21 and the rest is for oil. What percentage of the total does each fuel
cost?

My phone bill last month was 45. Of this, 13 went on Internet calls, 24 went on
long-distance calls and the rest went on local calls. What percentage of the bill was
for each of these types of call?

Last week the Smith family had a bill of 110.57 at the supermarket. Of this, 65.68
was spent on food, 35.88 on drinks and 9.01 on cleaning products. Work out
what percentage of the total bill was for food, drinks and cleaning products (round
off the answers to the nearest percent). Add the three percentages up. Why do they
not total 100%?

Fred drove from Barnsley to Portsmouth. The total distance was 245 miles. Of this,
32 miles was on B roads, 145 miles on A roads and 68 miles on motorways. What
percentage of the journey was on each type of road?

1 Write down 20% of 100.

2 Write down 20% of 120.
3 If 100 is increased by 20%, how much do you have?
4 If 120 is decreased by 20%, how much do you have?
5 Draw a poster to explain why a 20% increase followed by a 20%
decrease does not return you to the value you started with.

60
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:49 Page 61

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Percentage increase and decrease

SPORTY SHOES SHOES-FOR-YOU

31 off all trainers 30% off all trainers
Which shop gives the better value?

Example 4.10 a A shop has a sale and reduces its original prices by 15%. How much is the sale
price of:
i a microwave originally costing 95? ii a washer originally costing 225?
i 15% of 95 is (10% + 5%) of 95 = 9.5 + 4.75 = 14.25. So the microwave
costs 95 14.25 = 80.75.
ii 15% of 225 is 22.5 + 11.25 = 33.75. So the washer costs 225 33.75
= 191.25.
b A company gives all its workers a 3.2% pay rise. What is the new wage of:
i Joan, who at present earns 260 per week?
ii Jack, who at present earns 8.40 per hour?
i 3.2% of 260 is 3.2 100 260 = 8.32
So Joan gets 260 + 8.32 = 268.32 per week
ii 3.2% of 8.40 is 3.2 100 8.40 = 0.2688 = 27p
So Jack gets 8.40 + 27p = 8.67 per hour

Exercise 4E Do not use a calculator for the first three questions.

Work out the final amount when:

a 72 is increased by 10% b 36 is decreased by 10%
c 1.40 is increased by 20% d 99 is decreased by 20%
e 175 is increased by 15% f 220 is decreased by 15%
g 440 is increased by 25% h 422 is decreased by 25%
i 9.60 is increased by 35% j 6.40 is decreased by 15%

A bat colony has 40 bats. Over the breeding season the colony increases by 30%.
a How many bats are there in the colony after the breeding season?
b The colony increases by 30% again the next year. How many bats are there after
the second year?

In a wood there are 20 000 midges. During the evening bats eat 45% of the midges.
a How many midges were left after the bats had finished eating for the evening?
b Assuming that the midges do not increase in number during the following day
and the bats eat 45% of the remaining midges, how many are there after the
second night?

61
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:49 Page 62

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

You may use a calculator for the rest of this exercise.

a In a sale all prices are reduced by 3.5%. Give the new price of items costing:
i 19.40 ii 36 iii 42.60 iv 94.60?
b An electrical company increases its prices by 12.2%. Calculate the new price of
items costing:
i 550 ii 630 iii 885 iv 199?

A Petri dish contains 2400 bacteria. These increase overnight by 23%.

a How many extra bacteria are there?
b How many bacteria are there the next morning?

6 A rabbit colony has 230 rabbits. As a result of a disease, 47% die.

a How many rabbits die from the disease?
b How many rabbits are left after the disease?
c What percentage of the rabbits remain?

Work out the final price in euros when:

a 65 is increased by 12% b 65 is decreased by 14%
c 126 is increased by 22% d 530 is decreased by 28%
e 95 is increased by 132% f 32 is decreased by 31%
g 207 is increased by 155% h 421 is decreased by 18%
i 6.82 is increased by 236% j 5.40 is decreased by 28%

a In a sale all prices are reduced by 12 12 %. Give the new price of items that
previously cost:
i 23.50 ii 66 iii 56.80 iv 124
1
b An electrical company increases its prices by 17 2 % so that they include value-
added tax (VAT). Give the price with VAT of
items that previously cost:
i 250 ii 180 iii 284 iv 199

The government charges you VAT at 1712 % on most things you buy. Although
this seems like an awkward percentage to work out, there is an easy way to do
it without a calculator! We already know that it is easy to find 10%, which can
be used to find 5% (divide the 10% value by 2), which can in turn be used to
find 212 % (divide the 5% value by 2). Then 10% + 5% + 212 % = 1712 %.
Find the VAT on an item that costs 24 before VAT is added.
10% of 24 = 2.40, 5% of 24 is 1.20, and 212 % of 24 is 0.60.
So 1712 % of 24 = 2.40 + 1.20 + 0.60 = 4.20.
Work out the VAT on items that cost:
1 34 2 44 3 56 4 75 5 120 6 190

62
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:49 Page 63

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Real-life problems
Percentages occur in everyday life in many situations. You have already met percentage
increase and decrease. Percentages are also used when buying goods on credit, working
out profit and/or loss and paying tax.

Example 4.11 A car that costs 5995 can be bought on credit by paying a 25% deposit and then
24 monthly payments of 199.
a How much will the car cost on credit?
b What is the extra cost as a percentage of the usual price?
a The deposit is 25% of 5995 = 1498.75. The payments are 24 199 = 4776.
Therefore, the total paid = 1498.75 + 4776 = 6274.75.
b The extra cost = 6274.75 5995 = 279.75. This as a percentage of 5995 is
(279.75 5995) 100 = 4.7%.

Example 4.12 A jeweller makes a brooch for 250 and sells it for 450. What is the percentage
profit?
The profit is: 450 250 = 200
100
200
As a percentage of 250, this is 250
= 200 250 100 = 80%.

Example 4.13 Jeremy earns 18 000. His tax allowance is 3800. He pays tax on the rest at 22%.
How much tax does he pay?
Taxable income = 18 000 3800 = 14 200
The tax paid is 22% of 14 200
22
= 100
14 200 = 22 100 14 200 = 3124

Exercise 4F
A mountain bike that normally costs 479.99 can be bought using three different plans:

Plan Deposit Number of payments Each payment

6
A 20% 24 22
B 50% 12 20
C 10% 36 18

a Work out how much the bike costs using each plan.
b Work out the percentage of the original price that each plan costs.

A shop buys a radio for 55 and sells it for 66. Work out the percentage profit made
by the shop.

A CD costs 10.99. The shop paid 8.50 for it. What is the percentage profit?

63
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:49 Page 64

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

6 A car that costs 6995 can be bought by paying a 15% deposit, followed by 23
monthly payments of 189 and a final payment of 1900.
a How much will the car cost using the credit scheme?
b What percentage of the original cost is the extra cost on the credit scheme?

Work out the tax paid by the following people:

Person Income Tax allowance Tax rate

Ada 25000 4700 22%
Bert 32000 5300 25%
Carmine 10000 3850 15%
Derek 12000 4000 22%
Ethel 45000 7000 40%

A shop sells a toaster for 19.99 in a sale. It cost the shop 25. What is the
percentage loss?

a What is 10 decreased by 10%?

b Decrease your answer to a by 10%.
c What is 10 decreased by 20%?
d A shirt in a clothes shop is reduced from its original price by 20% because it has
a button missing. The shop is offering a further 15% off all marked prices in a
sale. John the shop assistant says:
I dont need to work out the
two reductions one after the
other, I can just take 35%
off the original price.

SALES

Is John correct? Explain your answer.

An insurance policy for a motorbike is 335. It can be paid for by a 25% deposit and
then five payments of 55.25.
a How much does the policy cost using the scheme?
b What percentage of the original cost of the policy is the extra cost?

Mrs Smith has an annual income of 28 000. Her tax allowance is 4500. She pays
tax at 22%.
a How much tax does she pay?
b It is discovered that her tax allowance should have been 6000. How much tax
does she get back?

64
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:49 Page 65

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

A TV costs 450. The shop has an offer 40% deposit and then 12 equal payments,
one each month for a year.
a How much is the deposit? b How much is each payment?

Which of these schemes to buy a three-piece suite priced at 999 is cheaper?

Scheme A: no deposit followed by 24 payments of 56
Scheme B: 25% deposit followed by 24 payments of 32
Give a reason why someone might prefer Scheme A.

5 I can work out lowest common multiples.

I can calculate a fraction of a quantity.
I can calculate percentages of a quantity.
I can multiply a fraction by a whole number (integer).

6 I can change fractions to decimals.

I can add and subtract fractions with different denominators.
I can calculate one quantity as a percentage of another.
I can use percentages to solve real-life problems.

7 I understand the effects of multiplying and dividing by numbers between 0 and 1.

I can use a multiplier to solve percentage problems.
I can use percentage change to solve more complex problems.

1 2004 Paper 2
In 2001 the average yearly wage was 21 842.
On average, people spent 1644 on their family holiday.
6
What percentage of the average yearly wage is that?
Show your working.

65
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:49 Page 66

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

2 2006 Paper 2

6 Kate asked people if they read a daily newspaper.

Then she wrote this table to show her results.

No 80 people = 40%
Yes 126 people = 60%

The values in the table cannot all be correct.

a The error could be in the number of people.

Copy and complete each table to show what the correct numbers could be.

No 80 people = 40% No people = 40%

Yes people = 60% Yes 126 people = 60%

b The error could be in the percentages.

Copy and complete the table with the correct percentages.

No 80 people = %
Yes 126 people = %

3 2007 Paper 2

7 One day, each driver entering a car park paid exactly 1.50.
Here is what was put into the machine that day.
CAR PARK
Pay exactly 1.50 to enter
Number of 1 coins 136
Machine accepts only 1 coins
Number of 50p coins 208
and 50p coins
On that day what percentage of drivers paid with three 50p coins?

4 2006 Paper 1
In a quiz game two people each answer 100 questions.
They score one point for each correct answer.
The quiz game has not yet finished.
Person A Person B
Each person has answered 90 questions.
The table shows the results so far. 60% of the first 90 50% of the first 90
questions correct questions correct
Can person B win the quiz game?
Explain your answer.

5 2005 Paper 2
A newspaper printed this information about the If the world was a village of 100 people,
worlds population. 6 people would have 59% of the total wealth.
On average, how many times as wealthy as one of The other 94 people would have the rest.
the other 94 people would one of these 6 people be?

66
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:49 Page 67

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

6 2002 Paper 2

a One calculation below gives the answer to the question: 7

What is 70 increased by 9%?

Write down the correct one.

70 0.9 70 1.9 70 0.09 70 1.09

b For each of the other calculations in a, write a question about percentages that it represents.

c Write down the decimal number missing from the following statement:

To decrease by 14%, multiply by

67
FM Ch 4 Holiday PB 8.3 30/4/08 17:16 Page 68

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Functional Maths

Going on holiday

This table shows the outgoing flights from Leeds to Tenerife.

1
Flight Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Departs Arrives
LS223 13:55 18:30
LS225 07:45 12:30

This table shows the return flights from Tenerife to Leeds.

Flight Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Departs Arrives
LS224 19:15 23:50
LS226 13:30 18:05

Mr and Mrs Brown and their two children are planning a weeks holiday to Tenerife.
Mr Brown goes on the Internet to find the times of the
planes from Leeds to Tenerife.
a On which days can they fly out to Tenerife?
b The family decides to fly out on Friday morning and
return on the latest flight on the following Friday. What
are the flight numbers for the two flights?
c How long are these two flights?
d When Mr Brown books the flights, he is informed that
he needs to check in at Leeds airport at least 2 12 hours
before the departure time of the flight. What is the latest
time the family can arrive at the airport?
e The return ticket costs 289 for an adult and 210 for a child. What is the total cost of the
tickets for the family?
f Each member of the family also has to pay a fuel supplement tax at 6.08, a baggage
allowance at 5.99 and 3 to book a seat. Find the total cost for the family.

Mr Brown decides to take some euros () for the holiday.

2 The exchange rate at the bank is 1 = 1.24.
a Mr Brown changes 450 at the bank. How many euros will he receive?
Give your answer to the nearest five euros.
b Mr Brown also has 120 dollars ($) from a previous holiday to change into
euros at the bank. The exchange rate at the bank is $1 = 0.52. How
many euros will he receive? Give your answer to the nearest five euros.
c Mr Brown returns from the holiday with 80. How much is this in pounds?
Give your answer to the nearest pence.

68
FM Ch 4 Holiday PB 8.3 30/4/08 17:16 Page 69

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

The scale shows the approximate Mr Brown wants to hire a car for six
3 conversion between stones (st) and 90 kg 14 st
4 days. He finds this information on
kilograms (kg). 13 st
the Internet.
80 kg
Each member of the family is allowed to 12 st
Hire a car: Ford Ka 12 per day
check in one bag weighing up to 20 kg.
70 kg 11 st Renault Clio 15 per day
a Mr Brown weighs his bag and finds it 10 st Opel Astra 20 per day
weighs 312 st. Will he be able to check 60 kg
9 st If youre heading out to Tenerif
in his bag? Give a reason for your e for
answer. 8 st
some sun, take advantage of our
50 kg
outstanding offer of 15% off ALL
b If each member of family takes one 7 st
car hire. This offer applies to
bag, what is the maximum weight 40 kg
6 st bookings on ALL car types.
they can check in. Give your answer
5 st
in stones. 30 kg
4 st Work out how much Mr Brown would
c Each member of the family is also pay for each car for the six days.
20 kg 3 st
allowed up to 10 kg of hand baggage.
Mrs Browns hand baggage weighs 2 st
10 kg
20 lb. (1 st = 14 lb) Will she be able to 1 st
take this onto the plane?
0 kg 0 st
Give a reason for your answer.

69
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 70

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

CHAPTER 5 Algebra 2
This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
How to simplify expressions in How to substitute into algebraic
algebra expressions
How to expand brackets How to add, subtract and
How to factorise expressions multiply with negative numbers
How to use index notation with
algebra

Algebraic shorthand
In algebra, to make expressions simpler, and to avoid confusion with the variable x, the
multiplication sign is usually left out. In the simpler expressions, the numbers go in
front of the variables. So:
3 m = 3m a b = ab w 7 = 7w d 4c = 4cd n (d + t) = n(d + t)

The division sign cannot be just left out. Instead, it is usually replaced by a short rule in
the style of a fraction (and later on, by a forward slash). So:
3m= 3 w7= w ab= a d 4c = d n
n (d + t) =
m 7 b 4c d+t
Division often leads to cancelling. You can show cancelling if you wish. Remember that
a = a. So:
a 1 = a, and a 1 =
1
1 1 2 1 1
4n 4
/ n 6m 6 m/ 4p 4
/ p 2p 5pq /5/pq = q
= =n = =6 = = =
4 4
/1 m m/
1
6 3
6
/ 3 10p 10
/ p/
2 1
2
1

n (d + t) =
n(d + t) =
/ d+t
3n 3n/ 3
1

The two sides of the equals sign (=) are always equal, although they may look different.
Therefore whatever you do to one side, you must do the same to the other side.

Example 5.1 Which of the following expressions are equal to each other? Write correct
mathematical statements for those that equal each other.
a+b ba ab b

ba a a
b b+a ab
We can pick out a + b as being equal to b + a (a + b = b + a) and ab as being equal
to ba (ab = ba). None of the others are the same.

70
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 71

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 5.2 Solve the equation 3x + 2 = 23.

Subtract the same value, 2, from both sides to keep the sides equal:
3x + 2 2 = 23 2
3x = 21
We now divide both sides by 3, again to keep both sides equal:
3x = 21

3 3
x =7

Example 5.3 Simplify these expressions.

a 4a b b 9p 2 c 3h 4i
Leave out the multiplication sign and write the number to the left of the letters:
a 4a b = 4ab b 9p 2 = 18p c 3h 4i = 12hi

Example 5.4 Simplify these expressions.

a 8x 2 b 5m m c 9q 12q
Set out each expression in a fraction style, and cancel the numerator and the
denominator wherever possible. So:
8x 5m 9q 9
a
2 = 4x b
m =5 c
12q =
12 = 43

Exercise 5A Simplify the following expressions.

a h 4p b 4s t c 2m 4n d 5w 5x 4
e b 9c f 3b 4c 2d g 4g f 3a h 4m 5p 3q

Write each of these expressions in as simple a way as possible.

a 4x 2 b 12x 3 c 20m 4 d 36q 3
e 4m m f 16p p g 7q q h 5n n
i 16m 2m j 20k 10k k 36p 9p l 25t 5t
m 18p 12p n 16q 10 o 15m 10m p 14t 6

Find the pairs of expressions in each box that are a+b

equal to each other and write them down. The first
b+a a+b=b+a
one is done for you.
ab

a mn b pq c ab d 6+x e 3y
m+n qp ba 6x 3+y
mn p + q a
x+6 3y
b

71
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 72

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Solve the following equations, making correct use of the equals sign.
a 2x + 1 = 11 b 4x 3 = 5 c 5x + 4 = 19 d 2x 1 = 13
e 4x + 3 = 9 f 6x 3 = 12 g 10x + 7 = 12 h 2x 5 = 10
i 3x 12 = 33 j 7x + 3 = 80 k 5x + 8 = 73 l 9x 7 = 65

Only some of the statements below are true. List those that are.
a b + c = d + e is the same as d + e = b + c
b a b = 6 is the same as 6 = a b
c 5x = x + 3 is the same as x = 5x + 3
d 5 2x = 8 is the same as 8 = 2x 5
e ab bc = T is the same as T = ab bc

Show by substitution which of the following either are not true or may be true.
a m(b + c) = mb + mc b (m + n) (p + q) = mp + nq
c (m + n) (m n) = (m m) (n n) d a(b + c) + d(b + c) = (a + d) (b + c)

Show by substitution that the following equations are always true.

1 1 +1
a+b
=
a b ab

2 1 1
b
=
a b a

3 a + c = ad
+ bc
b d bd

4 a
a
2ab
=
10 b 10 + b 100 b2
You could use a spreadsheet for this extension.

Like terms
5 apples + 3 apples can be simplified to 8 apples. Similarly, 5a + 3a can be simplified to
8a. 5a and 3a are called like terms, which can be combined because they contain exactly
the same letters.
5 apples + 3 bananas cannot be simplified. Similarly, 5a + 3b cannot be simplified.
5a and 3b are unlike terms, which cannot be combined.

Example 5.5 Simplifying:

a 5p 2p = 3p b 5ab + 3ab = 8ab
c 3x2 + 6x2 = 9x2 d 7y 9y = 2y (because 7 9 = 2)
e 3u 6u = 9u (because 3 6 = 9) f 5a + 2a + 3b = 7a + 3b
g 5p 2p + 7y 9y = 3p 2y h 8t + 3i 6t i = 8t 6t + 3i i
= 2t + 2i

72
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 73

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Exercise 5B Simplify the following expressions.

a
d
5h + 6h
3b 8b
b
e
4p + p
2j + 7j
c
f
9u 3u
6r 6r
4
g 2k + k + 3k h 9y y i 7d 2d + 5d
j 10i + 3i 6i k 2b 5b + 6b l 2b + 5b 7b
m 3xy + 6xy n 4p2 + 7p2 o 5ab 10ab
p 5a2 + 2a2 3a2 q 4fg 6fg 8fg r 6x2 3x2 5x2

Simplify the following expressions.

a 6h + 2h + 5g b 4g 2g + 8m c 8f + 7d + 3d
d 4x + 5y + 7x e 6q + 3r r f 4 + 5s 3s
g c + 2c + 3 h 12b + 7 + 2b i 7w 7 + 7w
j 2bf + 4bf + 5g k 7d + 5d2 2d2 l 6st 2st + 5t
m 4s 7s + 2t n 5h + 2i + 3h o 4y 2w 7w

Simplify the following expressions.

a 9e + 4e + 7f + 2f b 10u 4u + 9t 2t c b + 3b + 5d 2d
d 4a + 5c + 3a + 2c e f + 2g + 3g + 5f f 9h + 4i 7h + 2i
g 7p + 8q 6p 3q h 14j 5k + 5j + 9k i 4u 5t 6u + 7t
j 2s + 5t 9t + 3s k 5p 2q 7p + 3q l 2d + 5e 4d 9e

Simplify the following expressions.

a x2 + 5x + 2x2 + 3x b 5ab + 3a + 4ab + 7a c 4y2 4y + 3y2 5y
d 8mn 3n + 3mn + 2n e 5t2 8t 2t2 4t f 3q2 5q 6q2 + 3q

1 Show that any three consecutive integers always multiply together to give
a multiple of 6.
2 Prove that two consecutive integers multiplied together always give an
even number. (Hint: Start with the first number as n.)
6
Expanding brackets and factorising
Expressions often have brackets. The terms in the brackets can be multiplied by the term
outside. This is called expanding or multiplying out the bracket, and it removes the bracket.
When a number or variable multiplies a bracket in this way, it multiplies every term
inside the bracket.
When a negative number or variable multiplies a bracket, it changes all the signs in
the bracket.
After expanding brackets, it may be possible to simplify the answer.
Remember also that ab = ba.

73
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 74

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

The opposite to expanding is factorising. This puts the brackets back into an expression,
with a term outside the brackets. You can always check your factorising by expanding again.

Example 5.6 Expanding:

a 4(2s 3) = 8s 12
b m(2n + 4) = 2mn + 4m

Example 5.7 Expanding with negative numbers:

a 2(x + y) = 2x 2y
b 5(2d 4e) = 10d + 20e
c (2a + 4b) = 2a 4b
d (3x 2) = 3x + 2

Example 5.8 Expanding and simplifying:

a 3(2w + 3v) + 2(4w v) = 6w + 9v + 8w 2v = 14w + 7v
b 4(u 3t) 2(4u t) = 4u 12t 8u + 2t = 4u 10t

Example 5.9 Factorise:

a 6p + 12 b ab 8b
a Since 6 divides exactly into both 6p and 12, we take 6 outside the bracket:
6p + 12 = 6(p + 2)
b Since b divides exactly into both ab and 8b, we take b outside the bracket:
ab 8b = b(a 8)

Exercise 5C Expand the following brackets.

a 5( p + q) b 9(m n) c s(t + u)
d 4(3d + 2) e a(2b + c) f 3(5j 2k)
g e(5 + 2f ) h 10(13 5n) i 6(4g + 3h)

6 Expand the following brackets.

a (a + b) b (q p) c (3p + 4)
d (7 2x) e 3(g + 2) f 2(d f )
g 5(2h + 3i) h 4(6d 3f ) i 3(2j + k)

Expand and simplify the following expressions.

a 3w + 2(w + x) b 7(d + f ) 2d c 4h + 5(2h + 3s)
d 12x + 4(3y + 2x) e 2(2m 3n) 8n f 16p + 3(3q 4p)
g 8h (3h + 2k) h 12 (3e 4) i 4a (5b 6a)

74
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 75

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Expand and simplify the following expressions.

a
c
4(a + b) + 2(a + b)
6(5p + 2q) + 3(3p + q)
b
d
3(2i + j) + 5(3i + 4j)
5(d + f ) + 3(d f )
6
e 7(2e + t) + 2(e 3t) f 2(3x 2y) + 6(2x + y)

Expand and simplify the following expressions.

a 5(m + n) (3m + 2n) b 8(g + 3h) 2(2g + h)
c 7(d + 2e) 3(2d 3e) d 6(2 3x) 3(2 5x)

Factorise the following.

a 3x2 + 9 b 2ab 6 c 8ab + 3a 7
d 4x2 10 e 3a 4ab f 6ab + 5b
g 5mn + 3m h 10pq + 5 i 8mp 3m

1 Mandy was asked to factorise 6ab + 12abc. She wrote 2(3ab + 6abc),
3(2ab + 4abc), a(6b + 12bc), b(6a + 12ac). She then wrote the full
factorisation, which is 6ab(1 + 2c).
2 Write down the answer to the factorisation of the following.
a 4a + 12ab b 6ab 9b
c 8mn 6mp d 100t + 20mt
3 Prove that a(b + c) + b(a + c) + c(a + b) always equals 2(ab + bc + ac).

Using algebra with shapes

Example 5.10 Find:

a the perimeter.
b the area of the rectangle in the simplest expanded form.
k+3

a The perimeter is:

2(k + 3) + 2p or 2(k + 3 + p) = 2k + 2p + 6
b The area is:
p(k + 3) = pk + 3p

75
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 76

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 5.11 Find the area of the shape in the simplest expanded form.
First, split the shape into two parts y cm
A and B as shown.
Shape A has area xy cm2.
x cm A
Shape B has base 8 y cm.
So the area is: B 2 cm
2(8 y) = 16 2y cm2
8 cm
The total area is xy + 16 2y cm2.

4 Exercise 5D Find the length of the perimeter of each of the following shapes in the simplest
expanded form.

a 3a + 5 b 3a 1 c

2a 2d 5a 5a

k 3a

d 4xx + 3 e 2p f
3k 2kk + n
3t t+p
2y 2y
3t 2p t 4n + k 3kk + 2n
4x y
2p
3n

6 a
What is the total area of each of the following shapes?

7 cm
b
5 cm

2 cm
9 cm
w cm g cm
f cm

k cm

Look at the shape below. 8

3
t

It can be split into two rectangles in two different ways as shown.

76
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 77

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

i ii
6
a Use i to write an expression for the area of the whole shape.
b Use ii to write an expression for the area of the whole shape.
c Show that the expressions in a and b are equal to each other.

The diagram shows a shape split into three rectangles in two different ways.
9 9

5 5
2 2
x+1 x x+1 x
a Work out the area of each rectangle in both cases.
b Show that both ways give the same total area.

Look at the diagram below.

8 cm

A B
5 cm

x cm C D

12 cm

a Calculate the area of each small rectangle A, B, C, D in the simplest expanded

form.
b Calculate the area of the large rectangle.
c Show that the sum of the areas of the small rectangles equals the area of the
large rectangle.

The expression in each box is made by adding the expressions in the two boxes it
stands on. Copy the diagrams and fill in the missing expressions.
a b
? ?

3x + 4y 5x + 3y 2p + 6t 3p 2t

? x + 2y ? p + 4t ? ?

77
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 78

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

6 c

2n c
3n + 5c

?
d

?
6a + 4b

4a + b

n+c ? ? ? 2a b ?

1 Use a spreadsheet to verify that 3a + 3b is always the same as 3(a + b).

A B C D
1
Put any Put any Put in the formula Put in the formula
number in A number in B 3*A1 + 3*B1 3*(A1 + B1)
Copy the formulae from C1 and D1 down to about C20 and D20. Put a
variety of numbers in each row of columns A and B. Check that for any
type of number, negative and decimal, the value in cell C equals the
value in cell D for each row.
2 Use a spreadsheet to verify that (a + b)(a b) is always the same as a2 b2.

Index notation with algebra

You can save time by writing 5 5 5 as 53, using raised index notation to form powers.
In the same way, m m m can be written as m3.
Look at the following examples of multiplying powers:
m2 m3 = (m m) (m m m) = m m m m m = m5
t1 t2 = t (t t) = t t t = t3
k3 k4 = (k k k) (k k k k) = k k k k k k k = k7
Notice that:
m2 m3 = m2 + 3 = m5
t1 t 2 = t1 + 2 = t3
k3 k4 = k3 + 4 = k7
When multiplying powers of the same variable, add the indices:
xA xB = xA + B
Look at the following examples of dividing powers:
m6 m2 = m
6
m m m m m m = m6 2 = m4
2 =
m mm
t t t t = t4 1 = t3
t 4 =
t4 t =
t t
When dividing powers of the same variable, subtract the indices:
xA = xA B
xA xB =
xB

78
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 79

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 5.12 Simplifying:

a x x = x2
b 4m 3m = 12mm = 12m2
c 2a 3a 5a = 30aaa = 30a3

Example 5.13 Simplifying:

a 2m3 5m = 2 5 m3 m = 10m3 + 1 = 10m4

b m5 = m5 3 = m2
m5 m3 =
m3

c 8t 7 = 2t 7 2 = 2t 5
8t 7 4t 2 =
4t 2

Example 5.14 Expanding and simplifying:

a 3m(2m 4n) = 6m2 12mn
b a(a + 4b) b(2a 5b) = a2 + 4ab 2ba + 5b2
= a2 + 2ab + 5b2

Exercise 5E Write the following expressions using index form.

a aaa b rrrrr
c bbbbbbbb d 4a 3a
e 2g 3g 2g f 9k 4 2k k 3k

a Write f + f + f + f + f as briefly as possible.

b Write w w w w as briefly as possible.
c Show the difference between 5j and j 5.

Expand the following brackets.

a d(d + 1) b a(4a 3) c p(4 + p)
d w(6 3w) e f (3f + g) f u(2u 3s)

Expand and simplify the following expressions.

a d(d + h) + h(2h + d) b m(3m + 7n) + n(2m 4n) 6
c e(5e + 4f ) f (2e + 3f ) d y(4x 2y) + x(7y + 5x)
e k(4k 2t) t(3k + 7t) f j( j + 7r) r (2r 9j)

Expand and simplify the following expressions.

a 4d 2 + d(2d 5) b a(a + 1) + a(2a + 3)
c t(3t + 5) + t (2t 3) d w(5w + 4) w(2w + 3)
e u(5u 3) u(3u 1) f d(2d 5) d(7 3d)

79
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 80

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

6 Expand and simplify the following.

a
c
x(x3 + 3) + x2(5 + x)
4m(m2 1) + m 2(4 m)
b
d
3y(4y 5) + y 2(y + 3)
5t 2(8 t) + 2t(3t 2 5t)

7 Simplify the following.

a
e
m5 m3
x 6 x2
b
f
t4 t
n5 n
c
g
3k 2 2k 4
10y2 2y
d
h
4w 5 3w
16m 5 2m 3

Factorise the following.

a y2 + 3y b 2x2 + 3x c 3m3 5m d 2ab b2
e 5p2 10 f x3 + 3x2 g 3m2 2m h 7k3 + 3kp

Use a spreadsheet to investigate the statement:

The formula P = n2 n + 11 generates prime numbers for all values of n.

4 I can simplify algebraic expressions.

I can solve simple equations.
I can simplify algebraic expressions by collecting like terms.

5 I know the equivalence of algebraic expressions.

I can solve equations with two operations.
I can expand a bracket.
I can write algebraic expressions in a simpler form using index notation.

6 I can expand a bracket with a negative sign outside.

I can expand and simplify expressions with more than one bracket.
I can simplify algebraic expressions using index notation.

7 I can factorise simple expressions.

I can use index laws to simplify expressions.

80
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 81

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

1 2006 Paper 1
Write the correct operations (+ or or or ) in these statements.
aa=0 aa=1 a a = 2a aa=a 2
6
2 2006 Paper 1
Solve this equation.
3y + 14 = 5y + 1

3 2004 Paper 2
Look at these expressions.

5y 8 3y + 5
first expression second expression
What value of y makes the two expressions equal?
Show your working.

4 2005 Paper 2
Write these expressions as simply as possible.

3k 2k 9k 2

3k

5 2006 Paper 2 This value is the sum of the

5x + 2 values in the middle row.
Here are the rules for an algebra grid.
Use these rules to complete the algebra grids below. 5x 2
Copy the grids and write your expressions as simply 10x This value is the product of
as possible. the values in the middle row.

3x + 1 5x

2x 4x x+1

6x2

6 2007 Paper 1
Work out the values of m and n.
58
58 54 = 5 m = 5n
54

81
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 82

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

CHAPTER 6 Geometry and Measures 2

This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
The definition of a circle and the How to draw circles given the
names of its parts radius
How to use the formulae for the The metric units for area and
circumference and the area of a volume
circle How to calculate areas of two-
How to calculate the surface dimensional shapes
area and the volume of prisms How to calculate the surface
How to convert imperial units to area and volume of a cuboid
metric units

The circle
A circle is a set of points equidistant from a centre O. Circle
Make sure that you know all the following terms for O
different parts of a circle.

Circumference
Circumference The distance around the circle; a special name for the C
perimeter of a circle.

Arc
Arc A part of the circumference.

Radius
Radius The distance from the centre to the circumference. r
The plural is radii.

Diameter The distance from side to side passing through the centre; Diameter
the greatest width of a circle. d
The diameter d is twice the radius r :
d = 2r
Chord
Chord A line which cuts the circle into two parts.

Tangent A line that touches the circle at a single point on the

circumference. Tangent

82
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 83

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Segment
Segment An area of the circle enclosed by a chord and an arc.

Sector
Sector An area of the circle enclosed by two radii and an arc.

Semicircle
Semicircle Half a circle; the area of the circle enclosed by a diameter
and an arc.

How can you measure the circumference of a circle?

Is there a relation between the diameter and the circumference?
The following exercise will show you.

Exercise 6A This activity looks at the relation between the diameter and the circumference of a circle.
For the activity you will need compasses, a 30 cm ruler and a piece of string about 40 cm
6
long.
Copy the following table and draw circles with the given radii.
Measure the circumference of each circle by using the string, and complete the table.
Calculate the last column to one decimal place.

Radius r (cm) Diameter d (cm) Circumference C (cm) Cd

1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
5.5
6

What do you notice about the last column?

Can you say how the circumference is related to the diameter?
Write down what you have found out in your book.

83
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 84

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

6 1 How can you find the centre of a circle that you cannot cut out?
(Hint: Draw chords.)
2 Draw a circle on paper and cut it out. Draw a thin sector on the circle
and cut it out. Make a cone with the remaining larger sector. What
happens as you make the size of the removed sector larger?

Circumference of a circle
In Exercise 6A, you should have found that the circumference C of a circle with diameter
d is given approximately by the formula C = 3d.
In fact the number by which you have to multiply the diameter to get a more accurate
circumference is slightly larger than 3.
Over the centuries mathematicians have tried to find this number. It is a special number
for which we use the Greek letter (pronounced pi). The value of cannot be written
down exactly as a fraction or a decimal, so we have to use an approximation for it. The
approximations commonly used are:
= 22
7 (as a fraction)
= 3.14 (as a decimal to two decimal places)
= 3.141 592 654 (on a scientific calculator)
has been calculated to millions of decimal places, using computers to do the
arithmetic. So far no repeating pattern has ever been found.
To 30 decimal places = 3.141 592 653 589 793 238 462 643 383 270
Look for the key on your calculator.
We can now write the formula for calculating the circumference C of a circle with
diameter d as:
C = d
The diameter is twice the radius, so we also have:
C = d = 2r = 2r

Example 6.1 Calculate the circumference of the following circles. Give your answers to one
decimal place.
a b
6.4 m
8 cm

a d = 8 cm
So, C = d = 8 = 25.1 cm (to 1 decimal place)
b r = 6.4 m, so d = 12.8 m
C = d = 12.8 = 40.2 m (to 1 decimal place)

84
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 85

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Exercise 6B In this exercise take = 3.14 or use the key on your calculator.

Calculate the circumference of each of the following circles. Give your answers to
one decimal place.
a b c d e
6
5 cm 12 mm 2.3 m 1.5 cm 3.8 m

The Big Wheel at a theme park has a diameter of 40 m. How far would you travel in
one complete revolution of the wheel? Give your answer to the nearest metre.

Measure the diameter of a 2p coin to the nearest millimetre.

Calculate the circumference of the coin, giving your answer to
the nearest millimetre.

Entrance

The diagram shows the dimensions of a running track at a sports

centre. The bends are semicircles.

25.5 m

60 m
Calculate the distance round the track, giving your answer to the nearest metre.

The Earths orbit can be taken to be a

circle with a radius of approximately
150 million kilometres. Earths orbit

Sun
Calculate the distance the Earth
travels in one orbit of the Sun. Give Earth
your answer to the nearest million
kilometres.

Calculate the perimeter of the following semicircular shape, giving your answer to
one decimal place. 7
10 cm

85
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 86

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

7 1 In the following shapes, all the curves are semicircles.

Calculate the perimeter of each shape:
i using a calculator and giving your answer to one decimal place.
ii using = 22
7 and giving your answer as a mixed number.

a 4m b c

4m
9 cm
3 cm 3 cm 3 cm
15 cm

2 The distance round a circular running track is 400 m. Calculate the

radius of the track, giving your answer to the nearest metre.

3 a How I wish I could calculate pi exactly is a mnemonic to

remember to seven decimal places. A mnemonic is an aid to
remember facts. Can you see how this one works?
Look on the Internet to find other mnemonics for , or make one up
yourself.
b Look on the Internet to find the world record for the most number of
decimal places that has been calculated for so far.

Area of a circle
The circle shown has been
split into 16 equal sectors.
These have been placed
together to form a shape
that is roughly rectangular.
As the circle is split into
more and more sectors
which are placed together, the resulting shape eventually becomes a rectangle. The area
of this rectangle will be the same as the area of the circle.
The length of the rectangle is half the 1

2 C
circumference C of the circle and the
width is the radius r of the circle. So
r A
the area of the rectangle is given by:
A = 12 C r
= 12 2 r r
=rr
= r 2
So the formula for the area A of a circle with radius r is A = r 2.

86
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 87

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 6.2 Calculate the area of the following circles. Give your answers to one decimal place.
a b
4 cm 6.2 m

a r = 4 cm
So, A = p r2 = p 42 = 16p = 50.3 c m2 (to 1 decimal place)
b d = 6.2 m, so r = 3.1 m
A = r 2 = 3.12 = 9.61 = 30.2 m 2 (to 1 decimal place)
Different calculators work in different ways. For example, the following may be the
calculator keys needed for part a:
4 x2 =
Other calculators may require you to use the x2 key first.
Note that the answers could also be left in terms of to give: a 16 b 9.61
This may be necessary when a calculator is not allowed.

Exercise 6C In this exercise take = 3.14 or use the key on your calculator.

Calculate the area of each of the following circles. Give your answers to one
decimal place.
a b c d e
6
3 cm 12 mm 1.8 m 2.1 cm 6.7 m

Calculate the area of a circular tablemat with a diameter

of 16 cm. Give your answer to the nearest square centimetre.

P E N
E
Measure the diameter of a 1p coin to the nearest millimetre.
O N

N
Y

Calculate the area of one face of the coin, giving your

answer to the nearest square millimetre. 1

Calculate the area of the sports ground shown. The bends are semicircles. Give your
answer to the nearest square metre.

40 m

60 m

87
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 88

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

6 The minute hand on a clock has a length of 11 cm. Calculate the

area swept by the minute hand in one hour. Give your answer in
terms of . 9
10

8
11
12

Bloggs
1
2

4
3

7 5
6

80 90 100
110

7 Calculate the area of the semicircular protractor 70 100 90 80

70 12
60 110 60
0
0 13
12
50 0 50 0
shown, giving your answer to one decimal place. 13

14 0
14 0
4
0

0
4

15
160 30
0

30
0
15

160
180 170 20

20
170 180
10

10 0
0
10 cm

1 Calculate the area of each of the following shapes. Give your answers to
one decimal place.
a b 8 cm c

2 cm
8 cm 5 cm
3 cm

6 cm
4 cm

2 A circular lawn has an area of 100 m2. Calculate the radius of the lawn,
giving your answer to one decimal place.
3 A circular disc has a circumference of 20 cm. Calculate the area of the
disc, giving your answer to one decimal place.
4 Show that the formula for the area A of a circle with diameter d can also
be written as:
A = d
2

4

Surface area and volume of prisms

The following are the metric units for area, volume and capacity that you need to know.
Also given are the conversions between these units.

Area Volume Capacity

10 000 m2 = 1 hectare (ha) 1 000 000 cm3 = 1 m3 1 m3 = 1000 litres
10 000 cm2 = 1 m2 1000 mm3 = 1 cm3 1000 cm3 = 1 litre
100 mm2 = 1 cm2 1 cm3 = 1 ml

The unit symbol for litres is the letter l. In books, to avoid confusion with 1 (one), the full
unit name litres may be used instead of the symbol.

88
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 89

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 6.3 Convert: a 72 000 cm2 to m2 b 0.3 cm3 to mm3 c 4500 cm3 to litres
a 72 000 cm2 = 72 000 10 000 = 7.2 m2
b 0.3 cm3 = 0.3 1000 = 300 mm3
c 4500 cm3 = 4500 1000 = 4.5 litres

Prisms A prism is a three-dimensional (3-D) shape

which has exactly the same two-dimensional
g
o t h ir
(2-D) shape all the way through it. ig h t o n

B
n

Br
R
ock
This 2-D shape is the cross-section of the prism. ck
Ro

The shape of the cross-section depends on the type of prism,

but it is always the same for a particular prism.
The volume V of a prism is found by multiplying the area A Length l
of its cross-section by its length l:
V = Al
Area A

Example 6.4 Calculate: a the total surface area and

b the volume of the triangular prism shown.
a The total surface area is composed of two
equal right-angled triangles and three different 5 cm
rectangles. The area of one triangle is: 4 cm
4 3 = 6 cm2
10 cm
2
3 cm
The sum of the areas of the three rectangles is:
(3 10) + (4 10) + (5 10) = 120 cm2
So the total surface area is:
(2 6) + 120 = 132 cm2
b The cross-section is a right-angled triangle with an area of 6 cm2. So the volume
is given by:
area of cross-section length = 6 10 = 60 cm3

Exercise 6D Calculate i the total surface area and ii the volume of each of the following prisms.
a b
8 cm
c 9m 7
6 cm
10 cm 2.5 m

12 cm 6m
2 cm 8 cm 8m
5 cm

1.5 m

89
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 90

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

7 Convert the following.

a 0.83 hectares to m2 b 730 mm2 to cm2
c 1 500 000 cm3 to m3 d 3.7 m3 to litres

The section of pencil shown is a hexagonal prism with a

cross-sectional area of 60 mm2 and a length of 140 mm.
a Calculate the volume of the pencil in cubic millimetres.
b Write down the volume of the pencil in cubic centimetres.

The biscuit tin shown is an octagonal prism with a

cross-sectional area of 450 cm2 and a height of 8 cm.
Calculate the volume of the tin.

The diagram shows the cross-section of a swimming pool along its length. The pool
is 20 m wide.
25 m
1m
3m

5m

a Calculate the area of the cross-section of the pool.

b Find the volume of the pool.
c How many litres of water does the pool hold when it is full?

Andy is making a solid concrete ramp for wheelchair access to his house. The
dimensions of the ramp are shown on the diagram.

150 cm
20 cm

160 cm

a Calculate the volume of the ramp, giving your answer in cubic centimetres.
b What volume of concrete does Andy use? Give your answer in cubic metres.

90
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 91

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Volume of a cylinder
The cross-section of a cylinder is a circle with radius r.
r 7
The area of the cross-section is A = r 2.
h
If the height of the cylinder is h, then the volume V of the
cylinder is given by the formula:
V = r 2 h = r 2h
1 Calculate the volume of each of the following cylinders, giving your
answers to three significant figures:
a 5 cm b 12 m

4 cm 2m

2 Ask your teacher for some cylindrical objects. Calculate the volume of
each, using the most appropriate units.

Imperial units
In Britain we now use the metric system of units, but people still prefer to use the imperial
system in certain cases, as the examples show.

My height is
I need to order
5 7
3 pints of milk

The distance The recipe

to London is requires 1/2 lb
256 miles of butter

The following imperial units are still used and it is useful to be familiar with them.

Imperial units of length Imperial units of mass Imperial units of capacity

12 inches (in) = 1 foot (ft) 16 ounces (oz) = 1 pound (lb) 8 pints (pt) = 1 gallon (gal)
3 feet = 1 yard (yd) 14 pounds = 1 stone (st)
1760 yards = 1 mile (mi) 2240 pounds = 1 ton

Example 6.5 Express 5 ft 6 in in inches.

5 ft = 5 12 = 60 in
So 5 ft 6 in = 60 + 6 = 66 in

91
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 92

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 6.6 Express 100 lb in stones and pounds.

100 lb 14 = 7 st with 2 lb left over
So 100 lb = 7 st 2 lb

Rough metric equivalents of imperial units

Sometimes you need to be able to convert from imperial units to metric units by using
suitable approximations. It is useful to know the following rough metric equivalents of
imperial units. If better accuracy is required, the exact conversion factors should be used.
The symbol means is approximately equal to.

Units of length Units of mass Units of capacity

1 inch 2.5 centimetres 1 ounce 30 grams 134 pints 1 litre
1 yard 1 metre 1 pound 500 grams 1 gallon 4.5 litres
5 miles 8 kilometres

Example 6.7 Approximately how many kilometres are there in 20 miles?

5 miles 8 kilometres
So 20 miles 4 8 = 32 kilometres

Example 6.8 Approximately how many gallons are there in 18 litres?

4.5 litres 1 gallon
So 18 litres 18 4.5 = 4 gallons

Exercise 6E Express each of the following in the units given in brackets.

a 6 ft 2 in (in) b 22 yd (ft) c 2 lb 10 oz (oz)
d 6 st 5 lb (lb) e 3 12 gal (pt)

Express each of the following in the units given in brackets.

a 30 in (ft and in) b 20 ft (yd and ft) c 72 oz (lb and oz)
d 35 lb (st and lb) e 35 pt (gal and pt)

How many inches are there in:

a a yard? b a mile?

How many ounces are there in:

a a stone? b a ton?

Convert each of the following imperial quantities into the metric quantity given in
brackets.
a 6 in (cm) b 10 yd (m) c 25 mi (km)
d 8 oz (g) e 1 12 lb (g) f 7 pt (litres)
g 8 gal (litres)

92
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 93

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Convert each of the following metric quantities into the imperial quantity given in
brackets.
a 30 cm (in) b 200 m (ft) c 80 km (mi) d 150 g (oz)
e 3 kg (lb) f 6 litres (pt) g 54 litres (gal)

Pirre is on holiday in England and he sees this sign near

to his hotel. Approximately how many metres is it from
his hotel to the beach?

Mike is travelling on a German autobahn and he sees this road sign.

He knows it means that the speed limit is 120 kilometres per hour.
What is the approximate speed limit in miles per hour?

5
38.6
ltr

Steve needs 6 gallons of petrol to fill the tank of his car. The pump
only dispenses petrol in litres. Approximately how many litres of
petrol does he need?
OL
PETR
A metric tonne is 1000 kg. Approximately how many
pounds is this?

Annes height is 5 ft 6 in. She is filling in an application form for a passport and
needs to know her height in metres. What height should she enter on the form?

1 Working in pairs or groups, draw up a table to show each persons height

and weight in imperial and in metric units.
2 Other imperial units are less common, but are still used in Britain. For example:
furlongs to measure distance in horse racing
fathoms to measure the depth of sea water
nautical miles to measure distance at sea
Use reference material or the Internet to find metric approximations for
these units. Can you find other imperial units for measuring length, mass
and capacity that are still in use?
3 How long is 1 million seconds? Give your answer in days, hours,
minutes and seconds.
6

5 I can use a calculator to convert between imperial units and metric units.

6 I can use the appropriate formulae to calculate the circumference and the area of a circle.

7 I can calculate the surface area and the volume of a prism.

93
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 94

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

1 2001 Paper 2
6 A trundle wheel is used to measure distances.
Imran makes a trundle wheel, of diameter 50 cm.

a Calculate the circumference of Imrans trundle wheel. Show your working.

b Imran uses his trundle wheel to measure the length of the school car park.
His trundle wheel rotates 87 times. What is the length of the
car park, to the nearest metre?

2 2000 Paper 2
The diagram shows a circle and a square.

a The radius of the circle is 12 mm.

12 mm not drawn
What is the area of the circle to the nearest mm2? accurately

b The ratio of the area of the circle to the area of the

square is 2 : 1
What is the area of the square to the nearest mm2?

c What is the side length of the square?

3 2007 Paper 1
Kevin is working out the area of a circle with radius 4.
Area = 8 4
He writes:

Explain why Kevins working is wrong.

4 2002 Paper 2
The drawing shows two cuboids that have the same volume:

Cuboid A Cuboid B

4 cm 2 cm

5 cm x cm
5 cm 3 cm Not drawn
accurately

a What is the volume of cuboid A?

Remember to state your units.

b Work out the value of the length marked x in Cuboid B.

94
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 95

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

5 1999 Paper 1

a What is the volume of this prism?

You must show each step in your working.
10 cm
Not drawn
accurately
7
8 cm
6 cm
7 cm

b Prisms A and B have the same cross-sectional area.

A B

Not drawn
5 cm accurately
3 cm

Copy and complete the table:

Prism A Prism B

Height 5 cm 3 cm

Volume 200 cm3 cm3

6 2007 Paper 2
One face of a prism is made from 5 squares. Not drawn
accurately
Each square has side length 3 cm.
Work out the volume of the prism. 3 cm

10 cm

7 2007 Paper 2
This shaded shape is made using two semicircles.
Not drawn
One semicircle had a diameter of 20 cm. accurately

The other has a diameter of 30 cm. 20 cm

Calculate the perimeter of the shaded shape. 30 cm

95
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 96

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

CHAPTER 7 Algebra 3
This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
How to draw mapping diagrams How to use a function
from functions How to plot coordinates
How to identify a function from How to calculate with negative
inputs and outputs numbers
Special features of a linear graph
How to show and find average
speed on a distancetime graph

Linear functions
A function is a rule that changes a number into another number. In this chapter, functions
involve any of the following operations:

Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division

The functions in this chapter are linear. This means that they do not contain powers. Later
you will meet functions that do contain powers.
Functions can be illustrated using mapping diagrams, as shown in Example 7.1.

Example 7.1 Draw a mapping diagram to illustrate the function:

x 2x + 3
Draw two number lines as shown:
2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5
x

2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5
2x + 3
The top line is for the starting points or inputs. The arrows show how the function
x 2x + 3 maps its inputs to its outputs on the bottom line. The arrowheads point
to the outputs. So:
2 1
1 1
03
15
The diagram shows only part of an infinitely long pair of number lines with infinite
mappings.

96
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 97

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Exercise 7A a Using two number lines from 5 to 10, draw mapping diagrams to illustrate the
following functions. 6
i xx+2
ii x 2x + 1
iii xx2
iv x 2x 1
b In each of your mapping diagrams from a, draw the lines from 1.5, 0.5 and 1.5.

a Using number lines from 5 to 15, draw mapping diagrams to illustrate the
following functions.
i x 3x + 1
ii x 4x 1
iii x 2x + 5
iv x 3x 2
b In each of your mapping diagrams from a, draw the lines from 0.5, 1.5 and 2.5.

Write down the similarity between all the mapping diagrams of functions like:
xx+2 xx+1 xx+5 xx+7

a Using number lines from 0 to 10, draw a mapping diagram of the function
x 2x. Leave plenty of space above your diagram.
b Extend the line joining the two zeros upwards. Then extend all the other arrows
backwards to meet this line.
c Repeat the above for the mapping x 3x. Does this also join together at a point
on the line joining the zeros?
d Can you explain why this works for all similar functions?

1 a Draw a mapping diagram to show arrows joining the inputs and just
the final outputs for the combined function:
x 2 +2 2

b Write down, as simply as possible, the combined function in the form:

x Ax + B
2 Repeat the instructions in 1a and b for:
x 3 +3 3

x 4 +4 4

3 Explain what you notice about the results in 1 and 2.

97
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 98

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Finding functions from inputs and outputs

Any function will have a particular set of outputs for a particular set of inputs. If we can
find some outputs and inputs, then we can find the function.

Example 7.2 State the function that maps the inputs {1, 0, 1, 2, 3} to {1, 3, 7, 11, 15}.
Notice that for each integer increase in the inputs, the outputs increase by 4.
This suggests that part of the function is:
4

The input 0 maps to 3. Hence the function uses:

+3

This leads to the function:

x 4x + 3
A quick check shows that this does map 1 to 7, and 2 to 11. This confirms that the
function is correct.

Inverse functions The inverse of a function maps the outputs of the function back to the inputs.

Example 7.3 Function x x + 3 has inverse x x 3. This can be shown with some example
inputs:
function inverse
xx+3 xx3
25 52
8 11 11 8
Here the function maps the input 2 to the output 5. Then the inverse function takes
the 5 as its input and maps it to its output 2. This is the original input.

Example 7.4 x :
Function x 4x has inverse x
4
function inverse
x 4x x x
4
28 82
5 20 20 5

Most functions are more complicated. To find their inverses, we have to think of their
operations as building bricks and work back from output to input.

98
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 99

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 7.5 Find the inverse of the function x 4x + 3.

This function is built up as:
input function output
x 4 +3 4x + 3
We now reverse the path, call the new input x, and invert each operation to find the
inverse function:
output function input
x
3 4 3 x
4
Check:
function inverse
x 4x + 3 x x
3
4
5 23 23 5
7 31 31 7

Exercise 7B State the function that maps the following inputs to their outputs.
a {1, 0, 1, 2, 3} {4, 5, 6, 7, 8} 6
b {1, 0, 1, 2, 3} {2, 1, 0, 1, 2}
c {1, 0, 1, 2, 3} {1, 1, 3, 5, 7}
d {1, 0, 1, 2, 3} {3, 5, 7, 9, 11}
e {1, 0, 1, 2, 3} {2, 5, 8, 11, 14}

What are the functions that generate the following mixed outputs from the given
mixed inputs? (Hint: Put the numbers in sequence first.)
a {2, 5, 3, 0, 6, 4} {6, 8, 9, 3, 7, 5}
b {5, 9, 6, 4, 10, 8} {15, 17, 12, 16, 11, 13}
c {5, 1, 8, 4, 0, 6} {5, 13, 15, 3, 19, 11}
d {3, 1, 7, 5, 8, 2} {9, 1, 13, 5, 15, 3}
e {9, 5, 10, 6, 3, 7} {16, 10, 28, 19, 31, 22}

For each of the functions af:

i find the output for the input {0, 1, 2, 3}. 7
ii find the inverse function.
iii check that the inverse function maps the output from i back to {0, 1, 2, 3}.
a x 2x + 3 b x 3x + 4
c x 3x 2 d x 4x 1
e x 5x + 3 f x 5x 4

a Find the inverse function of x 10 x.

b What do you notice about your answer to a?
c This function is called a self-inverse. Can you explain why?
d Write down five more self-inverse functions.

99
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 100

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

7 When two functions are combined, the output of the first becomes the input
of the second. The combined function is treated as one function.
Investigate the following statements to find out which you think are true.
1 Two addition functions always combine to give a single addition
function.
2 Two multiplication functions always combine to give a single
multiplication function.
3 Changing the order of two combined functions makes no difference to
the result.

Graphs of functions
There are different ways to write functions. For example, the function:
x 4x + 3
can also be written as:
y = 4x + 3
The inputs are x and the outputs are y.
Functions written in this way are called equations. The equation form is simpler for
drawing graphs.
Every function has a graph associated with it. The graph is plotted against axes using
ordered pairs or coordinates of the function. The graph of a linear function or equation is
a straight line.

Example 7.6 Draw a graph of the function: y

y = 3x + 1 10
y = 3x + 1
First, we draw up a table of simple values for x: 8

6
x 2 1 0 1 2 3
4
y = 3x + 1 5 2 1 4 7 10
2
Then we plot each point on a grid, and join up all x
2 1 0 1 2 3
the points.
2

The line has an infinite number of other coordinates too. All of these obey the same
rule of the function, that is y = 3x + 1. Choose any points on the line that have not
been plotted and show that this is true: for example, (1.5, 5.5), (8, 25).

100
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 101

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Sometimes a function is expressed in a different way, such as:

2y + 3x = 12

Example 7.7 Draw the graph of 2y + 3x = 12.

We need to find at least three points to determine the straight line.
Two easy points to find are when x = 0 and y = 0:
when x = 0, 2y = 12; so y = 6 and (0, 6) is a point
when y = 0, 3x = 12; so x = 4 and (4, 0) is a point
A useful third point for x or y is about halfway between 0 and the higher value just
found. So here we could try x = 3 or y = 3 or both:
when x = 3, 2y + 9 = 12; so 2y = 3 and (3, 1.5) is a point
when y = 3, 6 + 3x = 12; so x = 2 and (2, 3) is a point
There are now sufficient points y
to draw the line as shown.
6
2y + 3x = 12
5

2
1

0 x
0 1 2 3 4 5

Exercise 7C a Complete the table below for the function y = 4x + 1.

x 2 1 0 1 2 3
6
y = 4x + 1 1

b Draw a grid with its x-axis from 2 to 3 and y-axis from 7 to 13.
c Use the table to help draw, on the grid, the graph of the function y = 4x + 1.

a Complete the table below for the function y = 4x 1.

x 2 1 0 1 2 3
y = 4x 1 1

b Draw a grid with its x-axis from 2 to 3 and y-axis from 9 to 11.
c Use the table to help draw, on the grid, the graph of the function y = 4x 1.

101
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 102

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

6 a Complete the table below for the functions shown.

x 2 1 0 1 2 3
y = 2x + 5 1 11
y = 2x + 3 1 7
y = 2x + 1 1 3
y = 2x 1 1 1
y = 2x 3 5 1

b Draw a grid with its x-axis from 2 to 3 and y-axis from 7 to 11.
c Draw the graph for each function in the table.
d What two properties do you notice about each line?
e Use the properties you have noticed to draw the graphs of the functions below.
i y = 2x + 2.5 ii y = 2x 1.5

a Complete the table below for the functions shown.

x 2 1 0 1 2 3
y = 3x + 4 2 13
y = 3x + 2 1 8
y = 3x 0 3
y = 3x 2 2 1
y = 3x 4 7 2

b Draw a grid with its x-axis from 2 to 3 and y-axis from 10 to 13.
c Draw the graph for each function in the table.
d What two properties do you notice about each line?
e Use the properties you have noticed to draw the graphs of the functions below.
i y = 3x + 2.5 ii y = 3x 2.5

7 By finding at least three suitable points, draw the graph of the function 4y + 2x = 8.

By finding at least three suitable points, draw the graph of the function 3y + 4x = 24.

6 Draw the graphs of:

y = 0.5x 2 and y = 0.5x + 2
Now draw, without any further calculations, the graphs of:
y = 0.5x 1 and y = 0.5x + 3

102
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 103

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Gradient of a straight line

The gradient or steepness of a straight line is defined as:
the increase in the y coordinate for an increase of 1 in the x coordinate
Examples of gradients:

y y
y = 2x + 1 y = 3x + 2
6 6

5 5
Increase of 3
4 4
up the y-axis
Increase of 2
3 3
up the y-axis
2 2
1 1
for 1 along x-axis for 1 along x-axis
0 x 0 x
0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4
2
gradient = gradient = 3
1 1

For any linear or straight-line equation of the form y = mx + c, you might have found the
following from the previous exercise:
m is the gradient of the line
y = mx + c
c is the intercept of the line on the y-axis
The intercept c is where the line cuts the y-axis. It is the value of y when x = 0. It is
sometimes called the constant.

Example 7.8 The diagram shows the graph of y = 2x + 3. y

y = 2x + 3
The gradient is m = 2. 8
7
The intercept is c = 3. Gradient of 2
6
5
4
3
Cuts y-axis at 3
2
1
0 x
0 1 2 3 4 5

103
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 104

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

6 Exercise 7D
a y
State the gradient of each of the following lines.

b y c y d y

6 6 6 6
5 5 5 5
4 4 4 4
3 3 3 3
2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1
0 x 0 x 0 x 0 x
0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4

State the equation of the straight line with:

a a gradient of 3 passing through the y-axis at (0, 5).
b a gradient of 2 passing through the y-axis at (0, 7).
c a gradient of 1 passing through the y-axis at (0, 4).
d a gradient of 7 passing through the y-axis at (0, 15).

For each of the equations af:

i write down the gradient.
ii write down the intercept on the y-axis.
iii sketch a graph without plotting points.
a y = 2x + 1 b y = 3x 4 c y = 4x + 1
d y = 5x 3 e y=x+2 f y = 0.5x + 2

7 For each of the following lines:

i find the gradient.
ii write down the coordinates of where the line crosses the y-axis.
iii write down the equation of the line.

a y b y c y d y

6 6 6 6
5 5 5 5
4 4 4 4
3 3 3 3
2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1
0 x 0 x 0 x 0 x
0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4

104
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 105

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Find the equations of the graphs that pass through the following points.
Hint: Plot each pair of points on a coordinate grid. Work out the gradient and
7
extend the line to cross the y-axis if necessary.
1 (0, 3) and (1, 4)
2 (0, 2) and (1, 5)
3 (1, 2) and (2, 3)
4 (1, 3) and (2, 7)
5 (2, 3) and (4, 7)
6 (3, 5) and (5, 11)

Real-life graphs
Graphs are all around us. They are found in newspapers, in advertisements, on TV, and so
on. They usually involve relationships between data.
When you draw graphs from data, you have to plot coordinates to identify the line or
lines. The axes must be labelled and marked accurately.

Distancetime A distancetime graph or travel graph uses data to describe a journey.

graphs
On a distancetime graph, a straight line shows average speed:

Average speed = distance travelled

time taken

Example 7.9 The graph shows an example of a journey.

150
Distance from home (km)

100

50

0
9 am 10 am 11 am 12 noon 1 pm
Time

The following describe the stages in the journey:

between 9 and 10 am, the average speed was 100 km/h (outward)
between 10 and 11 am, the average speed was zero (stopped)
between 11 and 11.30 am, the average speed was 100 km/h (outward)
between 11.30 am and 1 pm, the average speed was 100 km/h (returning)

105
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 106

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 7.10 I set off from home to pick up a dog from the vet. I travelled 112 hours at an average
speed of 60 km/h. It took me 30 minutes to get the dog settled into my car. I then
travelled back home at an average speed of 40 km/h as I did not want to jolt the dog.
Draw a distancetime graph of the journey.
The key coordinates (time, distance from home) are:
start from home at (0, 0)
arrive at the vets at (112, 90) (60 112 = 90 km)
set off from the vet at (2, 90)
arrive back home at (4 14, 0) (90 40= 214 h)
Then plot the points and draw the graph:

Distance from home (km)

100

80

60
40
20

0
0 1 2 3 4 5
Time (hours)

6 Exercise 7E a Draw a grid with the following scale:

horizontal: time, 0 to 5 hours, at 1 cm to 30 min
vertical: distance from home, 0 to 100 km, at 1 cm to 20 km
b Draw on the grid the travel graph that shows the following:
I travelled from home to Manchester Airport, at an average speed of 50 km/h.
It took me 2 hours. I stopped there for 30 minutes, and picked up Auntie Freda.
I brought her straight back home, driving this time at an average speed of 40 km/h.
c I set off to the airport at 9 am. Use the graph to determine what time I arrived
back home.

a Draw a grid with the following scale:

horizontal: time, 0 to 2 hours, at 1 cm to 20 min
vertical: distance from home, 0 to 60 km, at 1 cm to 10 km
b Draw on the grid the travel graph showing the following:
Elise travelled to meet Ken who was 60 km away. She left home at 11 am and
travelled the first 40 km in 1 hour. She stopped for 30 minutes to buy a present,
and then completed her journey in 20 minutes.
c What was Elises average speed over the last 20 minutes?

a Draw a grid with the following scale:

horizontal: time, 0 to 60 minutes, at 1 cm to 5 min
vertical: depth, 0 to 200 cm, at 2 cm to 50 cm

106
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 107

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

b A swimming pool, 2 m deep, was filled with water from a hose. The pool was
empty at the start and the depth of water in the pool increased at the rate of
4 cm/min. Complete the table below, showing the depth of water after various
6
times.

Time (min) 0 10 25 40 50
Depth (cm)

c Draw a graph to show the increase in depth of water against time.

Draw a graph for the depth of water in the same swimming pool if the water
was poured in with a different hose that filled the pool more quickly, at the rate of
5 cm/min.

A different swimming pool that contained water was emptied by a pump at the rate
of 30 gal/min. It took 3 hours for the pool to be emptied.
a Complete the following table that shows how much water is in the pool.

Time (min) 0 30 60 90 120 150 180

Water left (gal) 5400

b Draw a graph to show the amount of water left in the pool against time.

At 11 am, Billy and Leon set off towards each other from different places
32 km apart. Billy cycled at 20 km/h and Leon walked at 5 km/h.
Draw distancetime graphs of their journeys on the same grid to find out:
1 the time at which they meet.
2 the time at which they are 12 km apart.

5 I can complete a mapping diagram to represent a linear function.

6 I can find the linear function that connects two sets of data.
I can complete a table of values for a linear relationship and use this to draw a graph of
the relationship.
I can calculate the gradient of a straight line drawn on a coordinate grid and can distinguish
between a positive and a negative gradient.
I can draw and interpret graphs that describe real-life situations.
I can plot a straight-line graph using the gradientintercept method.

7 I can find an inverse function using a flow diagram.

I can plot graphs of the form ax + by = c.
I can find the equation of a line using the gradientintercept method.

107
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 108

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

1 2002 Paper 2
6 I went for a walk.
The distancetime graph shows information about my walk.
Write out the statement below that describes my walk: Distance
travelled
I was walking faster and faster.
I was walking slower and slower.
I was walking north-east. Time taken
I was walking at a steady speed.
I was walking uphill.

2 2002 Paper 1 y
14
The graph shows a straight line.
The equation of the line is y = 3x.
12
Does the point (25, 75) lie on the straight line y = 3x?
Explain how you know.
10

x
4 2 0 2 4 6

108
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 17:33 Page 109

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

3 2004 Paper 2
Kali uses a running machine to keep fit.
The simplified distancetime graph shows how
4
7
she used the machine during one run.
Use the graph to answer these questions. 3

a Between 0930 and 0940, what was her

speed in kilometres per hour?

Distance (km)
b Throughout the run, for how many minutes 2
did she travel at this speed?

c At 0940, she increased her speed.

By how many kilometres per hour did she
increase her speed? 1

0930 0940 0950 1000

Time

4 2005 Paper 1 y
The graph shows the straight line with equation y = 3x 4.
4
a A point on the line y = 3x 4 has an x-coordinate of 50.
What is the y-coordinate of this point?

b A point on the line y = 3x 4 has a y-coordinate of 50.

x
What is the x-coordinate of this point? 4 O 4

c Is the point (10, 34) on the line y = 3x 4?

Show how you know.
4

5 2007 Paper 2 y
The graph shows a straight line with gradient 1.
10
a On a copy of the graph, draw a different straight line with
gradient 1.

b The equation of another straight line is y = 5x + 20.

Write down the missing number.
0 x
The straight line y = 5x + 20 passes through (0, __). 10 0 10

c A straight line is parallel to the line with equation y = 5x + 20.

It passes through the point (0, 10).
What is the equation of this straight line?
10

109
FM Ch 7 M25 PB 8.3 30/4/08 17:18 Page 110

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Functional Maths

The M25

22 A1(M) To Stansted Airport

M25 Potters Bar Epping
20 21 23 25 M11 Chipping Ongar
M25
19 24 Enfield 26 27
Watford Barnet
M25 M1
18 M11 28
17 Southgate
Rickmansworth Chingford Brentwood

Borehamwood
M25

M40 29

16
LONDON 30
15 London
City 31
M4 M4 Airport
14 Dartford
Heathrow 1a
M25 Richmond
13 Staines Dulwich
Wimbledon 2
3
12 Bromley
M3
M3 M20
Weybridge
M25
11 4
Epson
9 Biggin Hill
5 M26
10 M25
Leatherhead 6 M25 Sevenoaks
Westerham
7
Dorking 8 5 Junction
Guildford M23
To Gatwick
Reigate Redhill Airport Scale 10 miles

The M25 motorway is an orbital motorway, 117 miles long, that encircles
London.
Construction of the first section began in 1973. Construction of the M25
continued in stages until its completion in 1986.
For most of its length, the motorway has six lanes (three in each direction),
although there are a few short stretches which are four-lane and perhaps
one-sixth is eight-lane, around the south-western corner. The motorway
was widened to 10 lanes between junctions 12 and 14, and 12 lanes
between junctions 14 and 15, in November 2005. The Highways Agency
has plans to widen almost all of the remaining stretches of the M25 to
eight lanes.
It is one of Europes busiest motorways, with 205 000 vehicles a day
recorded in 2006 between junctions 13 and 14 near London Heathrow
Airport. This is, however, significantly fewer than the 257 000 vehicles a
day recorded in 2002 on the A4 motorway at Saint-Maurice, in the suburbs
of Paris, or the 216 000 vehicles a day recorded in 1998 on the A 100
motorway near the Funkturm in Berlin.
The road passes through several counties. Junctions 15 are in Kent, 614
in Surrey, 1516 are in Buckinghamshire, 1724 are in Hertfordshire, 25 in
Greater London, 2628 in Essex, 29 in Greater London and 3031 in Essex.

110
FM Ch 7 M25 PB 8.3 30/4/08 17:18 Page 111

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Use the information on Look at the map of the M25.

the left to help you 1
a How many other motorways intersect with the M25?
answer these questions.
b How many junctions are on the M25?
Use the scale shown.
2
a The nearest point of the M25 to the centre of London is Potters Bar.
Approximately how far from the centre of London is this?
b The furthest point of the M25 from the centre of London is near
junction 10. Approximately how far from the centre of London is this?
In 2008 approximately 25 of the M25 was illuminated at night. How many
3 miles is this?
The original design capacity of the M25 was 65 000 vehicles a day.
4
a By how many vehicles per day does the busiest stretch exceed the
design capacity?
b Approximately how many vehicles a year use the M25 at its
busiest point?
There are three airports near to the M25 Heathrow, Gatwick and
5 Stansted. From Stansted to Heathrow via the M25 (anti-clockwise) is 67
miles. From Heathrow to Gatwick (anti-clockwise) is 43 miles. From
Gatwick to Stansted (anti-clockwise) is 73 miles. A shuttle bus drives
from Stansted and calls at Heathrow and Gatwick then returns to
Stansted. It does this four times a day. How far does it travel altogether?
The legal speed limit on the M25 is 70 mph. Assuming no hold ups how
6 long would it take to drive around the M25 at the legal speed limit?
Answer in hours and minutes.
Distance = speed time
Five miles is approximately equal to eight kilometres. How long, to the
7 nearest kilometre, is the M25?
The longest traffic jam on the M25 was 22 miles long. What percentage
8 of the total length was the length of the jam?
This table shows the lengths of the three longest orbital motorways in
9 the world and the length of the M60, which is the only other orbital
motorway in Britain.
City Country Road Length (miles)
Berlin Germany B-10 122
London England M25 117
Cincinnati USA I-275 84
Manchester England M60 35
C
The formula for the radius of a circle given the circumference is r =
2
Near to Heathrow Airport what is the average number of vehicles
10 using the M25 per hour each day? Give your answer to the nearest
100 vehicles.
a Assuming the M25 is a circle with a circumference of 117 miles what
would the radius be?
b Making the same assumption, calculate the radii of the other
orbital roads.

111
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:46 Page 112

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

CHAPTER 8 Number 3
This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
How to multiply and divide by How to multiply and divide by
powers of 10 10, 100 and 1000
How to round numbers to one How to round to the nearest 10,
or two decimal places 100 and 1000
How to check calculations by How to use brackets and
approximations memory keys on a calculator
How to use a calculator efficiently How to use standard column
methods for the four operations

Powers of 10

The nearest star, Proxima Centauri, is 40 653 234 200 000 kilometres from Earth. An atom
is 0.000 000 000 1 metres wide.
When dealing with very large and very small numbers it is easier to round them and work
with powers of 10. You will meet this later when you do work on standard form.
In this section you will multiply and divide by powers of 10 and round numbers to one or
two decimal places.

Example 8.1 Multiply and divide:

a 0.937 b 2.363 c 0.002 81 by i 10 ii 104
a i 0.937 10 = 9.37, 0.937 10 = 0.0937
ii 0.937 104 = 9370, 0.937 104 = 0.000 093 7
b i 2.363 10 = 23.63, 2.363 10 = 0.2363
ii 2.363 104 = 23 630, 2.363 104 = 0.000 236 3
c i 0.002 81 10 = 0.0281, 0.002 81 10 = 0.000 281
ii 0.002 81 104 = 28.1, 0.002 81 104 = 0.000 000 281

Example 8.2 Multiply and divide:

a 6 b 50 c 7.8 by i 0.1 ii 0.01
a i 6 0.1 = 0.6, 6 0.1 = 60 ii 6 0.01 = 0.06, 6 0.01 = 600
b i 50 0.1 = 5, 50 0.1 = 500 ii 50 0.01 = 0.5, 50 0.01 = 5000
c i 7.8 0.1 = 0.78, 7.8 0.1 = 78 ii 7.8 0.01 = 0.078, 7.8 0.01 = 780

112
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:46 Page 113

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 8.3 Work out:

a 0.00737 102 b 54.1 103
Round the answers to two decimal places.

a 0.00737 102 = 0.737

0.737 is 0.74 to two decimal places.
b 54.1 103 = 0.0541
0.0541 is 0.05 to two decimal places.

Exercise 8A Multiply the numbers below by:

a 5.3 b 0.79
i 10
c 24
ii 102
d 5.063 e 0.003 6
Divide the numbers below by: i 10 ii 103
a 83 b 4.1 c 457 d 6.04 e 34 781

Write down the answers to the following.

a 3.1 10 b 6.78 102 c 0.56 103 d 34 103
e 823 102 f 9.06 103 g 57.89 102 h 57.89 102
i 0.038 103 j 0.038 10 k 0.05 105 l 543 105

Multiplythe numbers below by: i 0.1 ii 0.01:

a 4.5 b 56.2 c 0.04 d 400 e 0.7

Divide the numbers below by: i 0.1 ii 0.01:

a 6.3 b 300 c 7 d 81.3 e 29

Calculate the following.

a 6.34 100 b 47.3 100 c 66 1000 d 2.7 1000
e 3076 10 000 f 7193 10 000 g 9.2 0.1 h 0.64 0.1
i 0.84 0.01 j 8.71 0.01 k 3.76 102 l 2.3 103
m 0.09 105 n 3.09 103 o 2.35 102 p 0.01 104

0.5 cm
1 cm
This grid represents a 1 cm 1 cm square that has been split into 100 equal smaller
squares. Give all your answers to the questions below in centimetres.
0.3 cm

A
a What is the area of each small square?
b How many small squares are there inside rectangle A, and what is its area?
1 cm

0.6 cm

B c Use your answer to b to write down the answer to 0.3 0.5.

d Rectangle B has an area of 0.3 cm2. Use this fact and the diagram to write down
the answer to 0.3 0.6.

Round these numbers to: i one decimal place. ii two decimal places.
a 4.722 b 3.097 c 2.634 d 1.932 e 0.784
f 0.992 g 3.999 h 2.604 i 3.185 j 3.475

113
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:46 Page 114

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

6 Multiply the numbers below by:

a 0.4717 b 2.6345
i 10 ii 102
c 0.0482
Round each answer to one decimal place.

Divide the numbers below by: i 10 ii 102

a 12.34 b 136.71 c 10.05
Round each answer to one decimal place.

1 Write down the answers to:

a 5 10 b 70 10 c 0.8 10 d 6.3 10
2 Write down the answers to:
a 5 10 b 70 10 c 0.8 10 d 6.3 10
3 Write down the answers to:
a 5 0.1 b 70 0.1 c 0.8 0.1 d 6.3 0.1
4 Write down the answers to:
a 5 0.1 b 70 0.1 c 0.8 0.1 d 6.3 0.1
5 Explain the connection between the answers to the above problems,
particularly the connection between multiplying by 10 and dividing by 0.1.
6 What is a quick way to calculate 73 0.01?

Large numbers

Example 8.4 Write down in words the two numbers shown in the table below.

106 105 104 103 102 10 1

a 6 0 5 8 7 0 2
b 1 7 0 0 0 5 6

Consider the numbers in blocks of three digits, that is:

6 058 702
1 700 056
In words, the numbers are:
a Six million, fifty-eight thousand, seven hundred and two
b One million, seven hundred thousand, and fifty-six

Example 8.5 The United Kingdom is said to have a population of 61 million. What is the largest
and smallest population this could mean?
As the population is given to the nearest million, the actual population could be as
much as half a million either way. So the population is between 6012 million and
6112 million, or 60 500 000 and 61 500 000.

114
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:46 Page 115

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 8.6 a The bar chart shows the annual profit for 50
a large company over the previous five
years. Estimate the profit each year. 40

Profit ( millions)
b The company chairman says, Profit in 30
2008 was nearly 50 million pounds. Is
20
the chairman correct?
10
a The profit was:
0
in 2004, about 19 million pounds 2004 2005 2006 2007 2008
in 2005, about 25 million pounds Year
in 2006, about 31 million pounds
in 2007, about 39 million pounds
in 2008, about 43 million pounds
b The chairman is wrong, as in 2008 the profit was nearer 40 million pounds.

Exercise 8B Write the following numbers in words.

a 3 452 763 b 2 047 809 c 12 008 907 d 3 006 098 4
Write the following numbers using figures.
a Four million, forty-three thousand, two hundred and seven
b Nineteen million, five hundred and two thousand, and thirty-seven
c One million, three hundred and two thousand, and seven

The bar chart shows the population of some countries in the European Community
(the actual figures may vary). Estimate the population of each country.

Spain

Germany

Italy

France

Ireland

Denmark

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Population (millions)

Round the following numbers to: i the nearest ten thousand. ii the nearest
hundred thousand. iii the nearest million.
a 3 547 812 b 9 722 106 c 3 042 309 d 15 698 999

There are 2 452 800 people out of work. The government says, Unemployment is
just over two million. The opposition says, Unemployment is still nearly three
million. Who is correct and why?

There are 8 million people living in London. What are the highest and lowest figures
that the population of London could be? 7
115
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:46 Page 116

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

a Copy this list of powers of 10. Write the missing powers of 10 in the boxes.
7 b
106 105 104 103 102 101 10 10 10 10 10
Use a calculator to work out, or write down, these numbers in full. The first two
have been done.
i 104 = 10 000 ii 101 = 0.1 iii 102 =
iv 102 = v 104 = vi 100 =

Standard form is a way of writing large numbers in a more manageable form.

For example, 3.1 10 6 means 3.1 1 000 000 = 3 100 000, and 4.54 10 9
= 4 540 000 000.
Write these standard form numbers in full.
a 2.9 107 b 3.56 105 c 1.17 108 d 2.2 106
e 9.5 10 8
f 8.3 10 6
g 2.31 1010 h 5.04 105

The common prefixes for units are kilo, as in kilogram (1000 grams), centi,
as in centilitre (one-hundredth of a litre), etc.
This table gives the main prefixes and their equivalent powers.

Prefix giga mega kilo centi milli micro nano pico

Power 109 106 103 102 103 106 109 1012

For example, 7 000 000 000 grams would be 7 gigagrams, although this is
more likely to be written as 7 kt, which is 7 kilotonnes.
1 Write the following quantities in a simpler form using words.
8 2
a 0.004 grams b 8 000 000 watts c 0.75 litres
Use the Internet or a reference book to find out the common
abbreviations for the prefixes in the table. For example, the
abbreviation for kilo is k, as in 6 kg.
3 Use the Internet or a reference book to find out how far light travels in
1 nanosecond.

Estimations

Example 8.7 Estimate the answers to:

a 12% of 923 b 11.2 + 53.6
c 324 59
18.7 9.6
a Round to 10% of 900 = 90
b 10 + 50 = 60
Round to = 6
20 10 10
c Round to 300 60 = 5

116
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:46 Page 117

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 8.8 For each question, one of the answers given in the brackets is correct. Without using
a calculator, choose the answer and give reasons for your choice.
a 18 (4.24, 5.24, 6.24) b 6 0.7 (5.8, 8.6, 65)
c 29 45 (905, 1250, 1305)
a 18 must be between 16 and 25, so 4.24 is the best choice.
b 6 0.7 must be bigger than 6, but not as large as 65, so 8.6 is the best choice.
c The answer is bigger than 30 40 1200, but must end in 9 5 = ?5, so 1305
is the best answer.

Exercise 8C
a
Estimate the value the arrow is pointing at in each of these.
b c
6
0.7 3.7 0 6.3 20 10

Estimate the answers to the following.

a
e
23% of 498
1
b 40
1.75 16
c 6.722
0.072 311
d 523 69
287 102
7
3 of 320 f g h
i 18.3 5.2
j 178 18
k 39.2 17.5
l 29.32

10.7 + 8.6 21 12.1 5.8 17.8 5.9
m 0.082 0.61 n 0.69 0.09 o (0.052)2 p 74% of 442

Pick out the answer given in brackets that is the most appropriate for the calculations
shown and justify your choice.
a 20 (3.5, 4.5, 5.5) b 49 57 (2793, 2937, 3033)
c 454 0.46 (150, 210, 280) d 8.7 0.01 (8, 87, 870)
e 7.072 (48, 50, 52) f 44 99 (3456, 4356, 5346)

Using estimates, write which of these statements is likely to be correct.

a The mean of 34, 56, 71, 82, 95 is between 40 and 90.
b In the most recent election 46% voted Labour, 37% voted Conservative and
16% voted for other parties (46% + 37% + 16% = 99%).
c (5.2915)2 = 38
d 7 235 = 23.2
e Eight packets of crisps at 47p per packet costs 4.14.

1 Without working out areas or counting squares, explain

why the area of the square shown must be between 36
and 64 grid squares.
2 Now calculate the area of the square.
3 Using an 8 8 grid, draw a square with an area of
exactly 50 grid squares.

117
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:46 Page 118

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Working with decimals

Example 8.9 Round the following numbers to: i two decimal places. ii three decimal places.
a 8.2625 b 0.087 63 c 3.6989
a 8.2625 = 8.26 (2 dp) = 8.263 (3 dp)
b 0.087 63 = 0.09 (2 dp) = 0.088 (3 dp)
c 3.6989 = 3.70 (2 dp) = 3.699 (3 dp)

Example 8.10 Calculate the area of the following shapes, giving your answers to one decimal
place.
a 3.41 cm b 5.7 m c 1.72 cm

1.62 cm
3.8 m 1.85 cm

2.31 cm
a Area of a rectangle = length width
= 3.41 1.62 = 5.5242 = 5.5 cm2 (1 dp)
b Area of a parallelogram = base height
= 5.7 3.8 = 21.66 = 21.7 m2 (1 dp)
c Area of a trapezium = half (sum of parallel sides) distance between them
= 0.5 (1.72 + 2.31) 1.85 = 3.727 75 = 3.7 cm2 (1 dp)

Exercise 8D Round the numbers below to: i two decimal places. ii three decimal places.
a 4.5682 b 8.7028 c 11.4239 d 42.7985
e 19.879 36 f 12.0969 g 23.9071 h 7.0505
i 7.2599 j 19.3008 k 6.0699 l 12.8539

Use a calculator to work out the following, then round the answers to two decimal
places.
a 1 55 b 1 17 c 2 17 d 3 17

e 456 f 5 63 g 5.2872 h 3.542 + 2.612

There are 1000 grams in a kilogram. Calculate the mass of the following shopping
baskets (work in kilograms).
a 3.2 kg of apples, 454 g of jam, 750 g of lentils, 1.2 kg of flour
b 1.3 kg of sugar, 320 g of strawberries, 0.65 kg of rice

118
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:46 Page 119

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

In an experiment a beaker of water has a mass of 1.104 kg. The beaker alone weighs
0.125 kg. What is the mass of water in the beaker?

A rectangle is 2.35 m by 43 cm. What is its perimeter (in metres)?

A piece of string is 5 m long. Pieces of length 84 cm, 1.23 m and 49 cm are cut from
it. How much string is left (in metres)?

A large container of oil contains 20 litres. Over five days the following amounts are
poured from the container:
2.34 litres, 1.07 litres, 0.94 litres, 3.47 litres, 1.2 litres
How much oil is left in the container?

Calculate the area of the following shapes, giving your answers to one decimal place.
a 4.07 cm b 2.3 m c 4.35 cm 6
2.34 cm
1.9 m 3.89 cm

6.42 cm

(pi) is a number that is used in calculating areas and circumferences of circles. It

cannot be found exactly, but many people have tried to find a simple fraction or
calculation for giving the value of to several decimal places.
The value of to nine decimal places is 3.141 592 654. Use your calculator to evaluate
the following approximations to and round them to two, three and four decimal places.
a 22 7 b 377 120 c 355 113
d Which do you think is the best approximation?

Much as fractions and decimals show the same thing, centimetres and
millimetres both show lengths. The first length shown on the rule below, AB,
can be given as 1.6 cm, 16 mm or 135 cm.

cm 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

A B C D E F G
Write the distances shown:
i in centimetres as a decimal. ii in millimetres. iii in centimetres as a fraction.
1 AC 2 BD 3 CE 4 DE 5 EF 6 EG

119
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:46 Page 120

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Efficient calculations
It is important that you know how to use your calculator. You should be able to use the basic
functions (, , +, ) and the square, square root and brackets keys. You have also met the
memory and sign-change keys. This exercise introduces the fraction and power keys.

Example 8.11 Use a calculator to work out:

152 + 114
a 3
(110
45) 34 b
212 178

a Using the fraction button and the arrows , type in the

calculation as:
( SHIFT 1 3 1 0 4 5 ) 3 4 =
The display should show 38. Note that the way this is keyed in may be different
on your calculator.
6
b Using brackets and the fraction buttons gives an answer of 4 25

(may also display
106
as 25 ).

To convert from an improper fraction ( 106

6
25 ) to a mixed number (4 25),

press SHIFT S D .

Example 8.12 Use a calculator to work out:

a 56 b 3 729 c 19.52 7.52

a Using the power button, x , the answer should be 15 625.

b This can be keyed in as:
SHIFT x 3 7 2 9 =
The answer is 9. Make sure you can use your calculator to find this answer.
c Using the square root, bracket and square keys the answer should be 18. For
example, the following are two ways to key the problem in to the calculator:

( 1 9 . 5 x2 7 . 5 x2 ) =
or
( 1 9 . 5 x2 7 . 5 x2 ) =

6 Exercise 8E Use the bracket and/or memory keys on your calculator to work out each of these.

a 38.7 23.1

3.82 + 1.38
b

4.12 0.92 c 9.75 (3.2 1.7)

Use the fraction key on your calculator to work out each of these (give your answer
as a mixed number or a fraction in its simplest form).
a 1
8 + 3
5 + 3
16 b 1 23 + 2 92 5
6 c 3
8 4
15 4
5

214 127 435 323

d (215 + 334) 217 e f
112 + 114
1
338 145

g (1 34 )2 h 3 11 7
16 1 16 i (2 23 + 1 18 ) 7
8

120
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:46 Page 121

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Use the power, cube and cube root keys on your calculator to work out each of
these (round your answers to one decimal place if necessary).
a 46 b 2.33 c 3
1331
6

d 34 + 43 e 210 f 4 (5.78)3

g 3 7.22 h (3 7.2)2 i 8.92 3.12

A time given in hours and minutes can be put into a calculator as a fraction.
25
For example, 3 hours and 25 minutes is 360
, which is entered as:
SHIFT 3 2 5 6 0

Using the fraction button on your calculator and remembering that 13 hour = 20
minutes, 15 hour = 12 minutes, and so on, do the following time problems (give your
answers in hours and minutes).
a Add 2 hours and 25 minutes to 3 hours and 55 minutes.
b Subtract 1 hour 48 minutes from 3 hours 24 minutes.
c Multiply 1 hour 32 minutes by 5.
d You can also use the button to input time so 3 2 5 displays as
3250. Repeat parts a, b and c using this button.

Most square roots and cube roots cannot be given as an exact value, so we have to
approximate them. The following are a selection of square roots and cube roots of
whole numbers. You do not know if the number is a square root or a cube root. Use
your calculator to find out if it is a square root or a cube root, and the number for
which it is either of these (a and b are done for you below).
a 1.414 21 b 2.154 43 c 3.419 95 d 2.236 07
e 4.472 14 f 1.442 25 g 2.289 43 h 5.477 23
a 1.414 212 = 1.999 990, so 2 1.414 21
b 2.154 433 = 9.999 935, so 310 2.154 43

On your calculator you may have a key or a function above a key marked x1 .
Find out what this key does. For example, on some calculators you can key:
x!
3 SHIFT x1 and the display shows 6,
and you can key:
x!
7 SHIFT x1 which gives a display of 5040.

Similarly, investigate what the key marked x1 does.

121
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:46 Page 122

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Multiplying and dividing decimals

Example 8.13 Work out:

a 8.6 6.5 b 1.43 3.4
a Firstly, estimate the answer, that is 9 6 = 54. This problem is done using a box
method, breaking the two numbers into their whole number and fractions. Each
are multiplied together and the totals added:

Sum of multiplications
8 0.6
48
6 48 3.6 4
0.5 4 0.3 3.6
0.3

55.9
The answer is 55.9.
b Firstly, estimate the answer, that is 1.5 3 = 4.5, to show 143
where the decimal point will be. This problem is then done 34

using standard column methods without decimal points: 572
4290
The position of the decimal point is shown by the estimate,
4862
and so the answer is 4.862.
Note that the number of decimal points in the answer is the same as in the
original problem, that is 1.43 3.4 = 4.862.

Example 8.14 Work out:

a 76.8 16 b 156 2.4
a Firstly, estimate the answer, that is 80 16 = 5.
Now consider the problem as 768 16: 768
640 (40 16)

128
64 (4 16)

64
The position of the decimal point is shown by 64 (4 16)

the estimate, and so the answer is 4.8. 0 (48 16)

b Firstly, estimate the answer, that is 150 3 = 50.

Now consider the problem as 1560 24: 1560
960 (40 24)

600
480 (20 24)

120
The position of the decimal point is shown by 120 ( 5 24)

the estimate, and so the answer is 65. 0 (65 24)
As you become used to this method of division, you can start to take away larger
chunks each time. For example, in b you could take away 60 24 instead of
40 24 and then 20 24. This will improve your mental multiplication too!

122
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:46 Page 123

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Exercise 8F Without using a calculator, and using any other method you are happy with, work out
the following.
a 6.3 9.4 b 5.8 4.5 c 2.7 2.7 d 1.4 12.6
e 0.78 2.5 f 1.26 3.5 g 2.58 6.5 h 0.74 0.22

Without using a calculator, and using any other method you are happy with, work
out the following.
a 78.4 14 b 7.92 22 c 24 3.2 d 12.6 3.6
e 143 5.5 f 289 3.4 g 57 3.8 h 10.8 0.24

Roller ball pens cost 1.23 each. How much will 72 pens cost?

Number fans cost 65p each. How many can be bought for 78?

The box method can be used to do quite complicated decimal

multiplications. For example, 2.56 4.862 can be worked out as follows: 6
4 0.8 0.06 0.002 Sum of row
2 8 1.6 0.12 0.004 9.724
0.5 2 0.4 0.03 0.001 2.431
0.06 0.24 0.048 0.0036 0.000 12 0.291 72
Total 12.446 72

Use the box method to calculate 1.47 2.429.

Check your answer with a calculator.

5 I can round numbers to one decimal place.

I can use bracket, square and square root keys on a calculator.
I can add and subtract decimals up to two decimal places.
I can multiply and divide decimals up to two decimal places.

6 I can multiply and divide by powers of 10.

I can approximate decimals when solving numerical problems.

7 I can round numbers to one significant figure.

I can make estimates by rounding numbers to one significant figure.
I can multiply and divide decimals by writing them as equivalent problems involving integers.

123
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:46 Page 124

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

1 2002 Paper 1

6 a The number 6 is halfway between 4.5 and 7.5.

6

4.5 7.5

What are the missing numbers below?

The number 6 is halfway between 2.8 and
The number 6 is halfway between 12 and
b Work out the number that is halfway between 27 38 and 33 38.

2 2002 Paper 2
A company sells and processes films of two different sizes.
The tables show how much the company charges.

Film size: 24 photos

Cost of each film 2.15
Postage Free
Cost to print film 0.99
Postage of each film 60p

Film size: 36 photos

Cost of each film 2.65
Postage Free
Cost to print film 2.89
Postage of each film 60p

I want to take 360 photos. I need to buy the film, pay for the film to be
printed and pay for the postage.

a Is it cheaper to use all films of 24 photos or all films of 36 photos?

b How much cheaper is it?

3 2006 Paper 1

7 Copy these multiplication grids and write in the missing numbers.

8 0.2
9 72 3 1.2
6 30 6

124
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:46 Page 125

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

4 2005 Paper 1
A three-digit number is multiplied by a two-digit number.
How many digits could the answer have?
7
Write the minimum number and the maximum number of digits that the answer could have.
You must show your working.

125
FM Ch 8 Taxes PB 8.3 30/4/08 17:19 Page 126

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Functional Maths

Taxes

There are two types of taxes direct tax and indirect tax.
Direct tax is tax taken directly from what you earn, for example Income tax.
Indirect tax is tax taken from what you spend, for example VAT.

Direct tax
Income tax
Each person has a tax allowance. This is the amount they are allowed to earn
without paying income tax.
Tax rates
Basic rate: First 36 000 of taxable pay is taxed at the rate of 20%.
Higher rate: Earnings above this amount are taxed at the rate of 40%.

Example 1 Example 2
Mr Gallaghers tax allowance is 5435. Mrs Seniors tax allowance is 5435.
He earns 25 000. She earns 70 000.
His taxable pay is 25 000 5435 = 19 565 Her taxable pay is 70 000 5435 = 64 565
So his income tax is: So her income tax is:
Basic rate: 20% of 19 565 = 3913 Basic rate: 20% of 36 000 = 7200
Higher rate: 40% of (64 565 36 000)
= 40% of 28 565 = 11426
So her total income tax is 18 626

Indirect tax
VAT
Value added tax is charged at three different rates on goods and services.
Standard rate (17.5%)
You pay VAT on most goods and services in the UK at the standard rate.
Reduced rate (5%)
In some cases, a reduced rate of VAT is charged, for example childrens car seats
and domestic fuel or power.
Zero rate (0%)
There are some goods on which you do not pay any VAT, for example:
Food
Books, newspapers and magazines
Childrens clothes
Special exempt items, such as equipment for disabled people

Example 3
Work out the 17.5% VAT charged on a bicycle costing 180 excluding VAT.
10% of 180 = 18
5% of 180 = 9
2.5% of 180 = 4.50
So 17.5% of 180 = 31.50

126
FM Ch 8 Taxes PB 8.3 30/4/08 17:19 Page 127

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Use the information Hollie earnt 16 000 last year. This year she had a pay
on taxes to answer 1 increase of 5%. How much does she earn now?
these questions.

Miss Howe receives her gas bill. What is the rate of VAT
2 that she will have to pay?

Mr Legg buys a wheelchair.

3
What is the rate of VAT that he pays?

Bradley bought a new child seat.

4 The cost was 90 excluding VAT.
a What rate of VAT is charged?
b Work out the total cost of the
child seat including VAT.

Kerry bought a mobile phone.

5 The cost was 260 excluding
17.5% VAT.
Work out the cost including VAT.

Mrs Pritchard earns 24 000. Her tax allowance is 6000.

6 She pays tax on the rest at 20%.
a How much does she pay tax on?
b How much tax does she pay?

Miss France earns 14 000. Her tax allowance Sohaib earns 5500. His tax allowance
7 is 5600. She pays tax on the rest at 20%. 8 is 6200.
a How much does she pay tax on? a Explain why he does not pay any tax.
b How much does she earn after the tax is b How much more can he earn before he has
deducted? to pay tax?

Mr Key earns 80 000 as a locksmith. His tax Miss Spent earns 72 000. Her tax allowance is
9 allowance is 5500. He pays tax on the first 10 9000. She pays tax on the first 36 000 of
36 000 of taxable income at 20%. He then taxable income at 20%. She then pays 40%
pays 40% tax on the remainder. tax on the remainder.
How much tax does he pay altogether? How much does she earn after the tax
is deducted?

127
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:47 Page 128

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

CHAPTER 9 Geometry and Measures 3

This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
How to recognise congruent How to reflect a 2-D shape in a
shapes mirror line
How to transform 2-D shapes How to rotate a 2-D shape
by combinations of reflections, about a point
rotations and translations How to translate a 2-D shape
How to enlarge a shape by a How to enlarge a shape by a
negative scale factor scale factor
How to recognise planes of How to recognise reflective
symmetry in 3-D shapes symmetry in 2-D shapes
How to solve problems using How to use ratio
ratio

Congruent shapes
All the triangles on the grid below are reflections, rotations or translations of triangle A.
What do you notice about them?

You should remember that the image triangles are exactly the same shape and size as the
object triangle A.
Two shapes are said to be congruent if they are exactly the same shape and size.
Reflections, rotations and translations all produce images that are congruent to the original
object. For shapes that are congruent, all the corresponding sides and angles are equal.

128
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:47 Page 129

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 9.1 Which two shapes below are congruent?

a b c d

Shapes b and d are exactly the same shape and size, so b and d are congruent.
Tracing paper can be used to check that two shapes are congruent.

Exercise 9A For each pair of shapes below, state whether they are congruent or not (use tracing
paper to help if you are not sure).
a b c

d e f

Which pairs of shapes on the grid below are congruent?

a c
b
d e

f g
h i

j l

129
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:47 Page 130

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Which of the shapes below are congruent?

a b c d

Two congruent right-angled triangles are placed together with two of their equal
sides touching to make another shape (an isosceles triangle), as shown on the
diagram below.

a How many different shapes can you make from the two triangles? To help, you
can cut out the triangles from a piece of card.
b Repeat the activity using two congruent isosceles triangles.
c Repeat the activity using two congruent equilateral triangles.

6 The four-by-four pinboard is divided into two congruent

shapes.
1 Use square-dotted paper to show the number of different
ways this can be done.
2 Can you divide the pinboard into four congruent shapes?

Combinations of transformations
The three single transformations you have met so far and the notation that we use to
explain these transformations are shown below.
Reflection Mirror line

A A Triangle ABC is mapped onto triangle ABC

by a reflection in the mirror line. The object
and the image are congruent.
B C C B

130
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:47 Page 131

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Rotation
B A

A Triangle ABC is mapped onto triangle ABC

C by a rotation of 90 clockwise about the
centre of rotation O. The object and the
image are congruent.
B C O

Translation
A
A
Triangle ABC is mapped onto triangle ABC
by a translation of 5 units to the right,
B C
followed by 1 unit up. The object and the
B C image are congruent.

The example below shows how a shape can be transformed by a combination of two of
the above transformations.

Example 9.2 y

Triangle A is mapped onto triangle C by

two combined transformations. Firstly, a
A rotation of 90 clockwise about the origin
O maps A onto B. Secondly, a reflection in
the y-axis maps B onto C. So triangle A is
O x mapped onto triangle C by a rotation of
C B 90 clockwise about the origin O, followed
by a reflection in the y-axis.

Exercise 9B Tracing paper and a mirror will be useful for this exercise.

Copy the diagram

onto squared paper:
a Reflect shape A
in mirror line 1 A
to give shape B.
b Reflect shape B
in mirror line 2
to give shape C.
c Describe the Mirror line 1 Mirror line 2
single transformation that maps shape A onto shape C.

131
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:47 Page 132

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Copy the diagram opposite y

onto squared paper.
a Reflect shape A in the x-
axis to give shape B. A
b Reflect shape B in the y-
axis to give shape C.
c Describe the single
transformation that maps O x
shape A onto shape C.

Copy the diagram opposite onto y

squared paper.
a Rotate shape A 90 clockwise
about the origin O to give A
shape B.
b Rotate shape B 90 clockwise
about the origin O to give
shape C.
O x
c Describe the single
transformation that maps
shape A onto shape C.

Copy the diagram opposite

onto squared paper.
a Translate shape A 3 units to
the right, followed by 2 units
up, to give shape B.
b Translate shape B 4 units to
the right, followed by 1 unit A
down, to give shape C.
c Describe the single
transformation that maps
shape A onto shape C.

132
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:47 Page 133

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Copy the triangles A, B, C, D, E and F onto a square grid, as shown.

y 6
C B

A
O x

E F

a Find a single transformation that will map:

i A onto B ii E onto F iii B onto E iv C onto B
b Find a combination of two transformations that will map:
i A onto C ii B onto F iii F onto D iv B onto E
c Find other examples of combined transformations for different pairs of triangles.

On squared paper, show how repeated reflections of a rectangle generate a

tessellating pattern.

1 Copy the congruent T shapes A, B, C y

and D onto a square grid, as shown.
Find a combination of two
A
transformations that will map:
a A onto B b A onto C
D
c A onto D d B onto C
e B onto D f C onto D
2 Use ICT software, such as LOGO, to O x
transform shapes by using various C
combinations of reflections, rotations
and translations. Print out some B
examples and present them on a poster.

133
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:47 Page 134

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Enlargements
A pinhole camera projects an
image of an object onto a screen. Image (inverted)
The image is inverted as it has
been produced by a negative
enlargement.
Camera
Object

In the diagram below, triangle ABC is enlarged by a scale factor of 2 to give triangle ABC.
A

Object A
Image
B B
O
C
C
Lines called rays or guidelines are drawn from O through A, B, C to A, B, C. Here the
scale factor is given as 2. So OA = 2 OA, OB = 2 OB, OC = 2 OC. The sides of
ABC are twice the corresponding sides of triangle ABC.
We say that object triangle ABC is enlarged by a scale factor of 2 about the centre of
enlargement O to give image triangle ABC.
The object and image are on the same side of O. The scale factor is positive. This is
positive enlargement.
Under any enlargement, corresponding angles on the object and image are the same.

Negative The diagram below shows object flag A enlarged by a scale factor of 2 to give image flag B.
enlargement
Image

Object
B
O
A

The size of the scale factor is 2 (ignoring the minus sign), so the lengths of the rays from
O to flag B are double the lengths of the corresponding rays to flag A. The length of each
line on flag B is double the corresponding line on flag A.
However, this time the image is inverted (upside-down) and on the other side of O
because the scale factor is negative (it has a minus). This is negative enlargement.

Negative When enlargement is on a grid, the principles are the same. The grid may or may not
enlargement have coordinate axes, and the centre of enlargement may be anywhere on the grid.
on a grid The grid means that you may not need to draw rays to find the image points.

134
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:47 Page 135

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 9.3 Enlarge XYZ by Y

Z
a scale factor of 2
about the centre of X
enlargement O. O

Draw rays from

points X, Y, Z to O. Y Z
Measure their lengths
X
and multiply by 2.
Continue the rays beyond O by these new lengths to give points X, Y and Z.
Join these points to give XYZ.
XYZ has been enlarged by a scale factor of 2 about the centre of enlargement O
to give XYZ.

Example 9.4 Enlarge ABC on the coordinate grid by a scale factor of 3 about the origin (0, 0).
y
6
5
4
3
A
2
1
C B B C
x
6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
1
2
3
4
5
A
6

Draw rays, or count grid units in the x and y directions, from points A, B, C to the
origin.
Multiply the ray lengths or x, y units by 3.
Continue beyond the origin by these new lengths or units to give points A, B, C.
Join these points to give ABC.
ABC has been enlarged by a scale factor of 3 about the origin (0, 0) to give ABC.
If a negative enlargement is about the origin of a grid, as in this case, the coordinates of
the image shape are the coordinates of the object shape multiplied by the negative
scale factor. So here:
object coordinates: A(2, 2) B(1, 0) C(2, 0)
image coordinates: A(6, 6) B(3, 0) C(6, 0)

135
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:47 Page 136

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

7 Exercise 9C Draw copies of (or trace) the shapes below and enlarge each one by the given scale
factor about the centre of enlargement O.
a scale factor 2 b scale factor 3 c scale factor 2

O
O

Copy the diagrams below onto a coordinate grid and enlarge each one by the given
scale factor about the origin (0, 0).
a scale factor 2 b scale factor 2 c scale factor 3
y y
a b
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
x x
6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
y
c
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
x
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

136
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:47 Page 137

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Copy the diagram shown onto a y

coordinate grid.
a Shape A is mapped onto shape B
12
11
7
by an enlargement. What is the A
10
scale factor of the enlargement? 9
b By adding suitable rays to your 8
diagram, find the coordinates of 7
the centre of enlargement. 6
c Shape A can also be mapped 5
onto shape B by a combination of 4
a rotation followed by an 3
enlargement. Carefully describe B
2
these two transformations.
1
0 x
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Copy the diagram shown onto centimetre squared paper.

y

8
7
6
A B
5
4
3
D C
2
1
0 x
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

a Enlarge the rectangle ABCD by a scale factor of 3 about the point (7, 4). Label
the rectangle ABCD.
b Write down the coordinates of A, B, C, D.
c i Write down the lengths of AB and AB.
ii Write down the ratio of the two sides in its simplest form.
d i Write down the perimeters of ABCD and ABCD.
ii Write down the ratio of the two perimeters in its simplest form.
e i Write down the areas of ABCD and ABCD.
ii Write down the ratio of the two areas in its simplest form.

1 Working in pairs or groups, design a poster to show how the

stick person shown can be enlarged by different negative scale
factors about any convenient centre of enlargement.
2 Use reference books or the Internet to explain how each of the
following uses negative enlargements.
a A camera b The eye
3 Use ICT software, such as Logo, to enlarge shapes by different negative
scale factors and with different centres of enlargement.

137
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:47 Page 138

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Planes of symmetry
A plane is a flat surface.
All the two-dimensional (2-D) shapes you have met so far have plane surfaces. These 2-D
shapes can have line symmetry.
Three-dimensional (3-D) shapes or solids can have plane symmetry.
A plane of symmetry divides a solid into two identical parts. Each part is a reflection of
the other.

Example 9.5 Draw diagrams to show the different

planes of symmetry for the cuboid:

The three planes of symmetry are rectangles:

7 Exercise 9D Write down the number of planes of symmetry for each of the following 3-D shapes.
a Cube b Cuboid c Square- d Regular e Regular
with two based tetrahedron octahedron
square faces pyramid

Write down the number of planes of symmetry for each of the following regular prisms.
a Triangular prism b Pentagonal prism c Hexagonal prism

A prism has an n-sided regular polygon as its cross-section. How many planes of
symmetry does it have?

138
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:47 Page 139

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Draw sketches to show the different planes of symmetry for each of the following solids.
a b c 7

Draw sketches of some everyday objects that have one or more planes of symmetry.
Below each sketch, write the number of planes of symmetry of the object.

Four cubes can be arranged to make the following different solids. Write down the
number of planes of symmetry for each.
a b c d

e f g h

1 Draw separate diagrams to show all the planes of symmetry for a cube.
2 Axes of symmetry
The diagram shows an axis of symmetry for a cuboid.
The cuboid has rotation symmetry of order 2 about
this axis.
a Draw diagrams to show the other two axes of
symmetry for the cuboid. What is the order of
rotational symmetry about each of these axes?
b How many different axes of symmetry can you find for a cube?
3 Use reference books or the Internet to find the number of planes of
symmetry for more complex 3-D shapes.

Shape and ratio

Ratio can be used to compare lengths, areas and volumes of 2-D and 3-D shapes, as the
following examples show.

Example 9.6 A B C D
12 mm 4.8 cm

To find the ratio of the length of the line segment AB to the length of the line
segment CD, change the measurements to the smaller unit and then simplify the
ratio. So the ratio is 12 mm : 4.8 cm = 12 mm : 48 mm = 1 : 4. Remember that
ratios have no units in the final answer.

139
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:47 Page 140

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 9.7 8 cm
4 cm
B 5 cm
A 3 cm

Find the ratio of the area of rectangle A to the area of rectangle B, giving the answer
in its simplest form.
The ratio is 12 cm2 : 40 cm2 = 3 : 10

Example 9.8 6 cm
2 cm
3 cm
2 cm

2 cm 4 cm

Find the ratio of the volume of the cube to the volume of the cuboid, giving the
answer in its simplest form.
The ratio is 8 cm3 : 72 cm3 = 1 : 9

Exercise 9E Express each of the following ratios in its simplest form.

a 10 mm : 25 mm b 2 mm : 2 cm c 36 cm : 45 cm
d 40 cm : 2 m e 500 m : 2 km

For the two squares shown, find each of 6 cm

the following ratios, giving your answers
in their simplest form. 2 cm
a The length of a side of square A to the A 2 cm B 6 cm
length of a side of square B
b The perimeter of square A to the
perimeter of square B
c The area of square A to the area of square B

6 Three rectangles A, B and C are arranged as in the diagram. The ratio of the length of
A to the length of B to the length of C is 3 cm : 6 cm : 9 cm = 1 : 2 : 3.
a Find each of the following ratios 9 cm C
in the same way, giving your
answers in their simplest form. 6 cm B
i The width of A to the width 3 cm A
of B to the width of C
ii The perimeter of A to the 2 cm 4 cm 6 cm
perimeter of B to the
perimeter of C
iii The area of A to the area of
B to the area of C
b Write down anything you notice about the three rectangles.

140
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:47 Page 141

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

In the diagram, flag X is Mirror Mirror

mapped onto flag Y by a
reflection in mirror line 1.
line 1 line 2 6
Flag X is also mapped onto
flag Z by a reflection in
mirror line 2.
X Y Z
Find the ratio of each of the
following lengths, giving
your answers in their
simplest form.
A B C D E
a AB : BC b AB : AE
c AC : AE d BD : CE
6 cm
a Find the ratio of the area of the small square to the
area of the surround, giving your answer in its
simplest form. 2 cm

b Express the area of the small square as a fraction of 2 cm 6 cm

the area of the surround.

The dimensions of lawn A and lawn B are given on the diagrams.

200 m

40 m

A 30 m B 150 m

a Calculate the area of lawn A, giving your answer in square metres.

b Calculate the area of lawn B, giving your answer in:
i square metres ii hectares (1 hectare = 10 000 m2)
c Find the ratio of the length of lawn A to the length of lawn B, giving your answer
in its simplest form.
d Find the ratio of the area of lawn A to the area of lawn B, giving your answer in
its simplest form.
e Express the area of lawn A as a fraction of the area of lawn B.

The dimensions of a fish tank are given on the diagram. 40 cm

a Calculate the volume of the fish tank, giving your
20 cm
answer in litres (1 litre = 1000 cm3).
b The fish tank is filled with water to three-quarters
of the height. Calculate the volume of water in 30 cm
the fish tank, giving your answer in litres.
c Find the ratio of the volume of water in the fish tank to the total volume of the
fish tank, giving your answer in its simplest form.

141
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:47 Page 142

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

7 1 For the three cubes shown, find each of the following ratios, giving your
answers in their simplest form.
a i The length of an edge of cube A to the length of an edge of cube B
ii The length of an edge of cube A to the length of an edge of cube C
b i The total surface area of cube A to the total surface area of cube B
ii The total surface area of cube A to the total surface area of cube C
c i The volume of cube A to the volume of cube B
ii The volume of cube A to the volume of cube C

A B C

1 cm
1 cm 2 cm 3 cm
1 cm 2 cm
2 cm 3 cm
3 cm

d Cube D has an edge length of k cm. Write down each of the

following ratios.
i The length of an edge of cube A to the length of an edge of cube D
ii The total surface area of cube A to the total surface area of cube D
iii The volume of cube A to the volume of cube D
2 You will need a sheet each of A5, A4 and A3 paper for this activity.
Measure the length and width of the sides of each sheet of paper to
the nearest millimetre.
a What is the connection between the length and width of successive
paper sizes?
b Find the ratio of the lengths for each successive paper size. Give
your answer in the form 1 : n.

5 I know how to recognise congruent shapes.

I can reflect, rotate and translate a 2-D shape.
I can express a ratio, giving it in its simplest form.

6 I can transform 2-D shapes by using a combination of transformations.

I can solve problems using ratio.

7 I can enlarge a 2-D shape by a negative scale factor.

I can recognise planes of symmetry in 3-D shapes.

142
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 19 30/4/08 16:47 Page 143

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

1 2001 Paper 1
Two parts of this square design are shaded black.
Two parts are shaded pink.
3 cm

3 cm
6
Show that the ratio of black to pink is 5 : 3.

9 cm

9 cm

2 2006 Paper 2
The diagram shows a shaded rectangle.
It is divided into four smaller rectangles, labelled A, B, C and D.
5 cm A B
Not drawn
accurately
7
The ratio of area C to area B is 1 : 2. 3 cm C D

Calculate area A.
5 cm 10 cm

3 2002 Paper 2 (adapted)

The grid shows an arrow.
Copy the arrow onto squared paper.
Draw an enlargement of scale factor
2 of the arrow. Use point C as the
centre of enlargement.
C

4 2007 Paper 1
A square of area 64 cm2 is cut to make two rectangles, A and B.
The ratio of area A to area B is 3 : 1. A B
Not drawn
accurately
Work out the dimensions of rectangles A and B.

Area = 64 cm2

143
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:07 Page 144

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

CHAPTER 10 Algebra 4
This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
How to solve more difficult How to add, subtract and
equations multiply negative numbers
How to substitute into a formula
How to create your own
expressions and formulae

Solving equations
The equations you are going to meet will contain an unknown, often written x. Solving an
equation such as 5x 3 = 27 means finding the actual value of x. By carefully using the
methods below, you can solve this sort of equation quickly and correctly every time.
Remember: you must always do the same to both sides of an equation.

Example 10.1 Solve the equation 5x 3 = 27.

Add 3 to both sides: 5x 3 + 3 = 27 + 3
5x = 30
Divide both sides by 5: 5x
= 30

5 5
x=6

Example 10.2 Solve the equation 4(2z + 1) = 64.

Expand the bracket: 8z + 4 = 64
Subtract 4 from both sides: 8z + 4 4 = 64 4
8z = 60
Divide both sides by 8: z = 7.5

Exercise 10A Solve the following equations.

a 2x + 3 = 17 b 4x 1 = 19 c 5x + 3 = 18 d 2y 3 = 1
e 4z + 5 = 17 f 6x 5 = 13 g 2 + 3x = 38 h 8 + 5x = 13
i 3 + 4m = 11 j 6 + 2n = 20 k 4 + 3x = 31 l 7 + 5x = 52

Solve the following equations.

a 2x + 5 = 12 b 2s 3 = 10 c 2t + 3 = 14 d 2g 5 = 12
e 4x + 3 = 13 f 4x 5 = 13 g 4v + 9 = 39 h 4x 3 = 11
i 6x 1 = 8 j 6q + 5 = 26 k 6x + 7 = 34 l 6p 8 = 37

144
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:07 Page 145

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Solve the following equations. Start by expanding the brackets. The convention is to
write the answer as it is said, with x on the left of the = sign: x equals 9 is written
x = 9. If the equation has x on the right, you can reverse the equation before you start
6
solving it, or after you have found x.
a 2(x + 3) = 16 b 4(x 1) = 16 c 5(x + 3) = 20
d 4(x + 1) = 12 e 6(x 5) = 18 f 30 = 2(x + 9)
g 2(3x + 1) = 14 h 4(2x 1) = 36 i 5(2x + 3) = 55
j 4(3x + 5) = 32 k 6(4x 5) = 42 l 110 = 10(2x + 9)
Joe got very mixed up with his homework. Here are his answers. In each case:
i write down where he has gone wrong. ii solve the equation correctly.
5
a 5x + 3 = 12 = 9 = 9 b 3x 7 = 8 = 1 = 3
c 4x + 5 = 11 = 16 = 4 d 6x 3 = 12 = 9 = 1.5
e 4(x + 7) = 60 f 3(x 4) = 18
4x + 7 = 60 = 53 3x 4 = 18 = 14
x = 47 x = 11
g 5(2x + 3) = 17 h 4(3x 7) = 32
10x + 15 = 17 = 2 12x 7 = 32 = 39
x=5 x=5
i 3(6x + 1) = 30 j 2(4x 3) = 14
18x + 3 = 30 = 27 8x 6 = 14 = 8
x=9 x=1
Sheehab solved some of his equations as shown below.
Solve: 4(2x + 1) = 64
Divide both sides by 4: 2x + 1 = 16
Subtract 1 from each side: 2x = 15
Divide both sides by 2: x = 7.5
Solve the following equations in the same way as Sheehab.
a 2(3x + 1) = 38 b 4(5x 3) = 68 c 3(4x + 5) = 63
Solve the following equations in two different ways:
i by first expanding the bracket. ii by first dividing both sides by a number.
a 5(3x 2) = 95 b 4(6x + 3) = 96 c 2(3x 4) = 25

In the diagram shown, the contents of any two adjacent boxes are added
together to give the contents of the box above them.
1 There are three consecutive integers from left to right in the boxes at
the bottom. x
a Use algebra to find the integers in the bottom boxes that give the top
box a total of 40. (Hint: Start with x as shown in the bottom left box.)
b Write down all the integers between 50 and 60 (inclusive) that cannot appear in the
top box.
2 There are now three consecutive even integers in the boxes at the bottom.
a Use algebra to find the integers in the bottom boxes that give the top box a total of 40.
b Write down all the integers between 80 and 100 (inclusive) that cannot appear in
the top box.

145
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:07 Page 146

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Equations involving negative numbers

The equations that you met in the last lesson all had solutions that were positive numbers.
This lesson will give you practice at solving equations involving negative numbers.

Example 10.3 Solve the equation 5x + 11 = 1.

Subtract 11 from each side: 5x + 11 11 = 1 11
5x = 10
Divide both sides by 5: = 10
5x
5 5
x = 2

Example 10.4 Solve the equation 5x = 10.

Divide both sides by 5: 5x
= 10

5 5
x = 2

Example 10.5 Solve the equation 8 3x = 20.

Subtract 8 from each side: 8 3x 8 = 20 8
3x = 12
Divide both sides by 3: 3x
= 12

3 3
x = 4

Exercise 10B Solve the following equations.

a 2x + 3 = 1 b 3x + 5 = 2 c 2x + 9 = 5 d 3h + 8 = 2
e 3d + 4 = 19 f 5x + 25 = 10 g 4x + 15 = 3 h 2x + 13 = 5
i 2 = 3x + 11 j 6n + 3 = 15 k 12 = 5r + 27 l 9x + 30 = 3

Solve the following equations.

a 13 + 2x = 5 b 6 + 3j = 21 c 15 + 4x = 7 d 24 + 5x = 4
e 27 + 4x = 31 f 9 + 2s = 15 g 22 + 3x = 28 h 18 + 5x = 3
i 33 + 4p = 9 j 1 + 2x = 17 k 12 = 24 + 3x l 2 = 17 + 5y

Solve the following equations.

a 3x + 6 = 12 b 4x 2 = 10 c 3x + 1 = 16 d 2x 4 = 12
e 4j + 3 = 13 f 2k 7 = 1 g 2x + 9 = 39 h 3x 2 = 11
i 6x 2 = 8 j 2m + 6 = 26 k 31 = 5x + 6 l 3x 10 = 37

Solve the following equations.

a 4x = 20 b 10x = 20 c 2x = 12 d 6x = 54
e 7x = 42 f 9 = 3x g 9x = 99 h 8 = 2x
i x = 13 j 5x = 20

146
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:07 Page 147

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Solve the following equations.

a 15 2x = 19 b 11 3x = 14 c 15 4x = 27 d 29 5x = 14
e 15 4e = 3 f 13 2x = 23 g 20 3x = 29 h 16 5x = 36
i 20 = 40 4f j 10 = 16 2w

Solve the following equations.

a 2(x + 3) = 4 b 4(x 5) = 8 c 5(x + 3) = 5 6
d 4(x + 5) = 8 e 6(z 5) = 36 f 10(y + 9) = 20
g 3(t 11) = 15 h 21 = 7(x + 5) i 44 = 4(3 2x)

Solve the following equations.

a 2(3x + 1) = 10 b 4(2x 1) = 28 c 5(2x + 3) = 5
d 4(3x + 5) = 8 e 26 = 2(4d 5) f 10(2a + 9) = 230
g 3(5v 11) = 27 h 7(2x + 5) = 7 i 27 = 3(7 2x)

Victoria has made a mistake somewhere in her working for each of the equations
shown. Can you spot on which line the error occurs and work out the correct
solution to each one?

a c
18 3x = 30 5(x + 10) = 5
18 3x + 3x = 30 + 3x 5x + 10 = 5
18 = 30 + 3x 5x + 10 10 = 5 10
18 + 30 = 30 + 3x 30 5x = 5
48 = 3x 5x = 5
48 = 3x 5 5
3 3 x = 1
x = 16
d
b 5(4x + 7) = 5
4 5x = 24 5(4x + 7) = 5
4 + 5x 4 = 24 4 5 5
5x = 20 4x + 7 = 1
5x = 20 4x + 7 7 = 1 7
5 5 4x = 8
x=4 4x = 8
4 4
x=2

1 The following equations each have two possible solutions, one where x is
positive, and one where x is negative. Use a spreadsheet to help you find
the solutions to each equation by trial and improvement.
a x(x + 5) = 24 b x(x 4) = 12
2 Use a spreadsheet to help you solve x(x + 8) = 12 by trial and
improvement. There are two answers, both negative, one greater than 4,
the other less than 4.

147
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:07 Page 148

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Equations with unknowns on both sides

Sometimes the unknown is on both sides of an equation. You need to add or subtract
terms in order to create an equation with the unknown on one side only.

Example 10.6 Solve the equation 5x 4 = 2x + 14.

Subtract 2x from both sides: 5x 4 2x = 2x + 14 2x
3x 4 = 14
Add 4 to both sides: 3x 4 + 4 = 14 + 4
3x = 18
Divide both sides by 3: 3x
= 18

3 3
x=6

Example 10.7 Solve the equation 4x + 2 = 7 x.

Add x to each side: 4x + 2 + x = 7 x + x
5x + 2 = 7
Subtract 2 from both sides: 5x + 2 2 = 7 2
5x = 5
Divide each side by 5: 5x
= 5

5 5
x=1

Exercise 10C Solve the following equations.

a 2x = 4 + x b 3x = 12 x c 4x = x 15 d 5x = 12 + x
e 3x = 19 + 2x f 5x = 16 3x g 4x = 14 + 2x h 5x = 2x 15
i 7x = 12 + 4x j 6x = 15 + 9x k 5x = 12 + 2x l 9x = 30 + 12x

6 Solve the following equations.

a 5x 3 = x 15 b 4x + 5 = x + 20 c 6x + 4 = x + 14
d 4x 2 = 2x + 8 e 5x 3 = 2x + 9 f 8x 6 = 3x 16
g 2x 5 = 6x 9 h 7x 10 = 3x 2 i 4x 6 = 9x 21

Solve the following equations.

a 4x + 3 = 9 + x b 8x + 5 = 19 + x c 5x + 4 = x 12
d 6x 4 = 12 2x e 7x 3 = 17 + 2x f 4x 5 = 7 + 2x
g 7 5x = 2x 14 h 5 + 4x = 11 + 2x i 7 + 3x = 15 + 7x

Solve the following equations. Begin by expanding the brackets.

a 2(x + 3) = 14 + x b 3(2x + 5) = 25 + x c 5(3x 4) = 12 + 7x
d 6x 4 = 2(4 + 2x) e 9x 3 = 3(2x 8) f 8x 10 = 2(3 + 2x)
g 2(5x + 7) = 3(7 + x) h 3(8 + 4x) = 4(9 + 2x) i 2(7x 6) = 3(1+ 3x)
j 3(2x 1) = 5(x 1)

148
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:07 Page 149

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Solve the following equations.

a 2x

x+5
+ 1 =1 b 5x

x+6
+3=2 c 10x
1= 3
2x + 5
7
1 The product of three consecutive numbers is 13 800. Use a spreadsheet
to help you find the three consecutive numbers. 6
2 The product of three consecutive even numbers is 63 840. Use a
spreadsheet to help you find the sum of the three consecutive even
numbers.

Substituting into expressions

Replacing the letters or variables in an expression by numbers is called substitution.
Substituting different numbers will give an expression different values. You need to be
able to substitute negative numbers as well as positive numbers into expressions.

Example 10.8 Calculate the value of 5x + 7 when: i x = 3 ii x = 4

i When x = 3, 5x + 7 = 5 3 + 7 = 22
ii When x = 4, 5x + 7 = 5 (4) + 7 = 20 + 7 = 13

Exercise 10D Write down the value of each expression for each value of x below.
a 3x + 5 i x=3 ii x=7 iii x = 1
b 4x 2 i x=4 ii x=5 iii x = 3
c 8 + 7x i x=2 ii x=6 iii x = 2
d 93 4x i x = 10 ii x = 21 iii x = 3
e x2 + 3 i x=4 ii x=5 iii x = 3
f x2 7 i x=6 ii x=2 iii x = 10
g 21 + 3x2 i x=7 ii x=3 iii x = 5
h 54 2x2 i x=3 ii x=5 iii x = 1
i 5(3x + 4) i x=5 ii x=4 iii x = 2
j 3(5x 1) i x=3 ii x=2 iii x = 6

If a = 2 and b = 3, find the value of each of the following.

a 3a + b b a 3b c 3(b + 4a)
d 5(3b 2a) e b (a 2b) f ab 2(3a 4b)

If c = 5 and d = 2, find the value of each of the following.

a 2c + d b 6c 2d c 2(3d + 7c)
d 4(3c 5d) e c + (d 2c) f cd 3(2c 3d)

149
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:07 Page 150

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

If e = 4 and f = 3, find the value of each of the following:

a e2 + f 2 b e2 f 2 c ef + 3e2 2f 2
d e(4f 2 e2) e f 2 (5f + e) f e2 (2e + f )

If g = 6, h = 4 and j = 7, find the value of each of the following:

a gh + j b g hj c ghj
d (g + h)(h + j) e gh hj + gj f g(h + j) h(g j)

6 What values of n can be substituted into n2 that give n2 a value less than 1?

What values of n can be substituted into (n 4)2 that give (n 4)2 a value less than 1?

1 that give
What values of n can be substituted into 1 a value less than 1?
n n

Find at least five different expressions that give the value 10 when x = 2 is substituted
into them.

7 Use a spreadsheet to find three solutions to the equation:

n3 18n2 100n + 1800 = 0
(Hint: The solutions all lie between 20 and +20.)

Substituting into formulae

Formulae occur in all sorts of situations, often when converting between two types of
quantity. Some examples are converting between degrees Celsius and degrees Fahrenheit,
or between different currencies such as from pounds () to euros ().

Example 10.9 The formula for converting a temperature C in degrees Celsius (C) to a temperature
F in degrees Fahrenheit (F) is:

F = 9C
+ 32
5
Convert 35C to F.
Substituting C = 35 into the formula gives:
9 35 + 32 = 63 + 32 = 95
F =
5
So 35 C = 95 F

150
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:07 Page 151

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 10.10 The formula for the area A of a triangle with base length b and height h is given by
A = 12 bh.
Calculate the base length b of a triangle whose area is 14 cm2 and whose height
is 7cm.
Substitute the values that you know into the formula:
14 = 12 b 7
Rearrange to get the unknown b by itself on one side:
14 7 = 12 b 7 7
2 = 12 b
2 2 = 12 b 2
b=4
So the base is 4 cm long.

Exercise 10E If A = 180(n 2), find A when: i n = 7 ii n = 12

If V = u + ft:
a find V when: i u = 40, f = 32 and t = 5 ii u = 12, f = 13 and t = 10
b find u when: V = 5, f = 1 and t = 2

M:
If D =
V
a find D when: i M = 28 and V = 4 ii M = 8 and V = 5
b find M when: D = 7 and V = 3

A magician charges 25 for every show he performs, plus an extra 10 per hour
spent on stage. The formula for calculating his charge is C = 10t + 25, where C is the
charge in pounds and t is the length of the show in hours.
a How much does he charge for a show lasting:
i 1 hour? ii 3 hours? iii 2 12 hours?
b The magician charges 30 for one of his shows. How long did the show last?

The following formula converts a temperature C in degrees Celsius (C) to a

temperature F in degrees Fahrenheit (F) .
F = 1.8C + 32
6
a Convert each of these temperatures to degrees Fahrenheit:
i 45 C ii 40 C iii 65 C iv 100 C
b Convert each of these temperatures to degrees Celsius:
i 50 F ii 59 F iii 41 F iv 23 F

If N = h(A2 B2), find N when: i h = 7, A = 5 and B = 3 ii h = 15, A = 4 and B = 2

If V = hr 2, find V when: i h = 5 and r = 3 ii h = 8 and r = 5

151
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:07 Page 152

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

6 The volume V of the cuboid shown is given by the formula:

V = abc
The surface area S of the cuboid is given by the formula:
S = 2ab + 2bc + 2ac

a
c

b
a Find: i the volume ii the surface area
when a = 3 m, b = 4 m and c = 5 m.
b Find: i the volume ii the surface area
when a = 3 cm and a, b and c are all the same length.
iii What name is given to this cuboid?

The triangle numbers are given by the following formula:

T = n(n
+ 1)
2
The first triangle number is found by substituting n = 1 into the formula, which gives
T = 1 (1+ 1) = 1
2
a Find the first 10 triangle numbers.
b Find the 99th triangle number.

1=
1
1 , calculate:
7 If

i
F U V
F when U = 4 and V = 5 ii V when F = 2 and U = 3

1=
If 1+
1 , calculate:
T A B
i T when A = 3 and B = 2 ii A when T = 2, B = 8

Use a spreadsheet to help you find three different solutions to the equation:
n3 3n2 18n + 40 = 0
(Hint: The solutions all lie between 10 and +10.)

152
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:07 Page 153

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Creating your own expressions

and formulae
The last lesson showed you some formulae that could be used to solve problems. In this
lesson you will be given problems and have to write down your own formulae to help
solve them.
You will need to choose a letter to represent each variable in a problem, and use these
when you write the formula. Usually these will be the first letters of the words they
represent, for example V often represents volume and A is often used for area.

Example 10.11 Find a formula for the sum S of any three consecutive whole numbers.
Let the smallest number be n.
The next number is n + 1 and the biggest number is n + 2.
So S = n + ( n + 1) + ( n + 2)
S=n+n+1+n+2
S = 3n + 3

Example 10.12 How many months are there in: i 5 years? ii t years?
There are 12 months in a year, so:
i in 5 years there will be 12 5 = 60 months
ii in t years there will be 12 t = 12t months

Exercise 10F Using the letters suggested, construct a simple formula in each case.
a The sum S of three numbers a, b and c.
b The product P of two numbers x and y.
c The difference D between the ages of two people, the elder being a years old
and the younger b years old.
d The sum S of four consecutive integers, the lowest of which is n.
e The number of days D in W weeks.
f The average age A of three boys whose ages are m, n and p years.

Juno is now 13 years old.

a How many years old will she be in t years time?
b How many years old was she m years ago?

A car travels at a speed of 30 mph. How many miles will it travel in:
a 2 hours? b t hours?

How many grams are there in:

a 5 kg? b x kg?

153
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:07 Page 154

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

How many minutes are there in m hours?

Write down the number that is half as big as b.

Write down the number that is twice as big as t.

If a boy runs at b miles per hour, how many miles does he run in k hours?

Write a formula for the cost C in pence of the following.

a 6 papers at q pence each
b k papers at 35 pence each
c k papers at q pence each

6 A boy is b years old and his mother is 6 times as old.

a Write the mothers age in terms of b.
b Write both their ages in 5 years time in terms of b.
c Find the sum S of their ages in y years time, in terms of b and y.

Mr Speeds age A is equal to the sum of the ages of his three sons. The youngest son
is aged x years, the eldest is 10 years older than the youngest, and the middle son is
4 years younger than the eldest. Write a formula for Mr Speeds age.

7 a

b
A man is now three times as old as his daughter. Write a formula with two
variables to show this.
In 10 years time, the sum of their ages will be 76 years. Write a second formula
to show this, using the same two variables.
c Substitute the formula from a into the formula from b to find the daughters
age now.
d How old was the man when his daughter was born?

A group of pupils had to choose between playing football and playing badminton.
The number of pupils that chose football was three times the number that chose
badminton. The number of players for each game would be equal if 12 pupils who
chose football were asked to play badminton. Find the total number of pupils.

Find three consecutive odd numbers for which the sum is 57. Let the first odd
number be n.

154
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:07 Page 155

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

John wanted to build a cuboid with a volume of approximately 1000 cm3.

The length had to be three times greater than the width. The height had to be
5 cm less than the width. Find the width, length and height of the cuboid.
7
Use a spreadsheet to help you.

5 I can solve linear equations where the solution may be fractional or negative.
I can substitute positive and negative numbers into algebraic expressions.
I can substitute positive and negative numbers into formulae.
I can devise an algebraic formula to represent a simple relationship.

6 I can solve linear equations containing brackets where the solution may be fractional or negative.
I can solve equations with the unknown value on both sides.
I can substitute positive and negative numbers into formulae.

7 I can solve equations containing algebraic fractions.

I can use a spreadsheet to solve cubic equations.
I can substitute positive and negative numbers into fractional formulae.
I can set up formulae and equations to represent complex situations.

1 2002 Paper 2
Look at these equations:
3a + 6b = 24 6
2c d = 3

a Use the equations above to work out the value of the expressions below.
The first one is done for you. Copy and complete the others.
12
8c 4d = ______
i a + 2b = ______
ii d 2c = ______

b Use one or both of the equations above to write an expression that has a value of 21.

155
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:07 Page 156

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

2 2003 Paper 1

6 Solve these equations.

Show your working.
3t + 4 = t + 13 2(3n + 7) = 8

3 2005 Paper 2
I think of a number.
I multiply this number by 8, the subtract 66.
The result is twice the number that I was thinking of.
What is the number I was thinking of?

4 2007 Paper 1
Solve this equation.
2(2n + 5) = 12

7 5 2004 Paper 2
Doctors sometimes use this formula to calculate how much medicine to give a child.

c is the correct amount for a child, in ml

ay
c = a is the amount for an adult, in ml
12 + y
y is the age of the child, in years

a A child who is 4 years old needs some medicine.

The amount for an adult is 20 ml.
Use the formula to work out the correct amount for this child.
You must show your working.

b Another child needs some medicine.

The amount for an adult is 30 ml.
The correct amount for this child is 15 ml.
How old is this child? Show your working.

6 2006 Paper 2
You can find the approximate volume of a tomato by using this formula:
V is the volume,
V = 16 d 2 h d is the diameter,
h is the height.
The diameter and the height of a tomato are both 3.5 cm.
What is the approximate volume of this tomato in cm3?

156
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:07 Page 157

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

7 2007 Paper 2
I am going to use a wooden beam to support a
load.
cross-section
7
The cross-section of the beam is a rectangle.
The formula below gives the greatest load, M kg, that a beam of this length can support.

M = 5d 2w where d is the depth of the beam in cm,

w is the width of the beam in cm.

I can place the cross-section of the beam in two different ways.

In which way will the beam be able to support the greater load? d = 11 1st way d=8 2nd way
Also, calculate and write down the difference in kilograms.
w=8 w = 11

157
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:07 Page 158

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

CHAPTER 11 Statistics 2
This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
How to write questions for a How to interpret data from
questionnaire tables, graphs and charts
How to collect data How to find mode, median,
How to use two-way tables mean and range for small data
How to construct statistical sets
diagrams for discrete data How to write a short report of a
When to use range, mean, statistical survey
median and mode How to design a data-collection
How to construct stem-and-leaf sheet
diagrams
How to compare two sets of data
How to analyse data

Statistical surveys
In the picture the teenagers are carrying out a survey about healthy
eating. Do you think that their results will be fair if they only interview
people who are buying burgers? How can they collect the data and
make sure that many different opinions are obtained? How many people
do you think they should ask?

Example 11.1 Here are some questions that might be used in a survey. Give a reason why each
question is not very good and then write a better question.
a How old are you?
b Do you eat lots of fruit or vegetables?
c Dont you agree that exercise is good for you?
d If you go to a sports centre with your friends and you want to play badminton,
do you usually play a doubles match or do you just practise?
a This is a personal question. If you want to find out about the ages of people, use
answer boxes and group several ages together.
1 015 1 1630 1 3145 1 4650 1 More than 50
b This question is asking about two different items, so the answers may be
confusing. It may be awkward to answer with a yes or a no. It is better to
separate fruit and vegetables in the survey. You can then ask about the quantity
eaten, for example how many pieces of fruit per week.
c This question is trying to force you to agree. It is a leading question. A better
question would be, Is exercise good for you? You could then limit people to
answers such as very and not at all.
d This question is too long. There is too much information, which makes it difficult
to answer. It should be split up into several smaller questions.

158
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:07 Page 159

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Exercise 11A
Choose one of the following statements for a statistical survey. For the statement chosen:
7
Write a testable hypothesis based on the statement.
Write three or four questions for a questionnaire to test the hypothesis.
Decide how you will record the data you collect.
Collect information from at least 30 people.

Girls spend more on clothes than boys.

Old people use libraries more than teenagers.

People who holiday abroad one year, tend to stay in Britain the
following year.

Pupils who enjoy playing sports eat healthier foods.

More men wear glasses than women.

Families eat out more than they used to.

Take each problem statement from the exercise and write down how you would
collect the data required. For example, would you collect the data using a
questionnaire or by carrying out an experiment, or would you collect the data
from books, computer software or the Internet? Also, write a short report or list
on the advantages and disadvantages of each method of data collection.

Stem-and-leaf diagrams

The speeds of vehicles in a 30 mph limit are recorded. The speeds are sorted into order
and put into a stem-and-leaf diagram as shown. The slowest speed is 23 mph. The fastest
speed is 45 mph. How can you tell this from the stem-and-leaf diagram?

2|3 7 7 8 9 9
3|1 2 3 5 5 5 7 9
4|2 2 5 Key: 2 | 3 means 23 miles per hour
How many cars are breaking the speed limit?

159
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:07 Page 160

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 11.2 A teacher asked 25 pupils how many pieces of homework they were given in one
week. The results are shown in the stem-and-leaf diagram:
0|1 1 2 2 2 2 3 5 7 7 7 8 9
1|0 0 1 1 1 2 4 4 5 6
2|1 3 Key: 1 | 2 means 12 homeworks
Use the stem-and-leaf diagram to find:
a the median b the range c the mode
a The median is the middle value. As there are 25 pupils, the middle value is the
13th. So the median is 9 homeworks.
b The range is the difference between the biggest and the smallest values. The
biggest value (most homeworks) is 23, and the smallest value (least homeworks)
is 1. So the range is 23 1 = 22 homeworks.
c The mode is the value that occurs the most. So the mode is 2 homeworks.

Example 11.3 A hospital clinic records the number of patients seen each day. Here are some
results:
141 132 128 145 137 138 140 149 131 143
139 125 126 142 132 129 127 134 130
a Put the results into a stem-and-leaf diagram (remember to show a key).
Find:
b the median c the range d the mode

a 12 | 5 6 7 8 9
13 | 0 1 2 2 4 7 8 9
14 | 0 1 2 3 5 9 Key: 12 | 5 means 125 patients
b As there are 19 pieces of data the middle is the 10th, so the median is 134
patients.
c The most patients seen is the last value, 149, and the least patients seen is the
first value, 125. So the range is 149 125 = 24 patients.
d Only one value, 132, occurs more than once. So the mode is 132 patients.

6 Exercise 11B 15 sales people have a competition to find out who sells the most items in one day.
Here are the results:

1|2 2 3 7 7
2|1 4 4 4 5 5 6
3|0 2 5 Key: 1 | 2 means 12 items
a How many items did the winner sell? b What is the mode?
c Find the range. d Work out the median.

160
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:07 Page 161

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

35 Year 8 pupils are asked to estimate how many text messages they send on their
mobile phones each week. Their replies are put into a stem-and-leaf diagram.
0|5 5 6 7 8 8
6
1|0 0 0 0 0 1 1 4 4
1|8 9 9 9
2|0 0 1 3 3 3 4
2|5 6 7
3|0 0 4
3|5 6 6 Key: 0 | 5 means 5 text messages
Work out the following.
a The mode b The smallest estimate c The range d The median

A farmer records the number of animals of each type on his farm. There are six types
of animal. His results are shown in the stem-and-leaf diagram.
5|2 6 8
6|5 9
7|5 Key: 5 | 2 represents 52 animals of one type
a He has more sheep than any other type of animal. How many sheep does he
have?
b How many animals has he altogether?
c Explain why a stem-and-leaf diagram may not be the best way to represent these
data.

The ages of 30 people at a 32 12 47 25 23 23 17 36 42 17

disco are as shown. 31 15 24 49 19 31 23 34 36 45
47 12 39 11 26 23 22 38 48 17
a Put the ages into a stem-and-leaf diagram (remember to show a key).
b State the mode.
c Work out the range.

A survey is carried out into the maximum speeds, in miles per hour, of a range of
cars. Here are the results:
101 98 107 123 131 102 112 115 126 99 120 97
93 88 122 149 130 136 116 129 130 104 118
a Put the speeds into a stem-and-leaf diagram (remember to show a key).
b Work out the median speed.
c Work out the range.

Obtain your own data. These could be from the Internet or from a textbook
on another subject. Alternatively, you could use some of the data collected
for Exercise 11A. Make sure they are suitable for stem-and-leaf use.
Produce a brief summary of your data. Use a stem-and-leaf diagram to
present the information.

161
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:07 Page 162

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Interpreting graphs and diagrams

In this section you will learn how to interpret graphs and diagrams, and how to criticise
statements made about the data that they contain.

Example 11.4 The diagram shows how a group of pupils say they spend their time per week.

Watching TV Homework
10% 8% Eating
7%
School
20%
Other
20%

Sleeping
35%

Matt says, The diagram shows that pupils spend too much time at school and doing
homework. Give two arguments to suggest that this is not true.
The diagram represents a group of pupils, so the data may vary for individual pupils.
It could also be argued, for example, that pupils spend longer watching TV than
doing homework.

Exercise 11C

6 A journey is shown on the distancetime graph. Chris says that the total distance
travelled is 60 km. Explain why Chris is incorrect.

100

90

80

70

60
Distance
(km) 50

40

30

20

10

0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Time (h)

162
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:07 Page 163

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

The results of a junior school throwing competition are shown in the bar chart.
18
16
7
14
12
Number
10
of pupils
8
6
4
2
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Distance (m)

a Alex says, The longest throw was 5.4 metres. Could she be correct?
Explain your answer.
b Ben says, The median throw was between 2 and 3 metres. Could he be correct?
Explain your answer.
c Becky says, The range of the throws is 6 metres. Explain why she is incorrect.

The pie chart shows how Drug offences Burglary

crimes were committed in Violent crime 7% 18%
a town over a month. 10%
a It is claimed that most
crime involves theft.
Explain why this is
incorrect. Other
b Write down two 25%
statements using the
information in the pie
Theft
chart. 40%

The table shows information Farm Animal population Animal population

about the animal populations 1995 2000
on four small farms in the
years 1995 and 2000. A 143 275
a Which farm has increased B 284 241
the number of animals
C 86 75
between 1995 and 2000?
b Which farm has shown D 102 63
the largest decrease in Total 615 654
animal population from
1995 to 2000?
c A newspaper headline says that farm animal populations are increasing. Using
the information in the table, criticise this headline.

Find a graph or chart from a newspaper. Write down the facts that the newspaper article
is claiming that the graph or chart shows. Use different arguments, referring to the graph
or chart, to cast doubt on the facts given.

163
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:07 Page 164

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Scatter graphs

A doctor records the size

of the pupils of peoples
eyes and the brightness of
the sunlight. He then plots
the results on a graph.
What can you tell about
the connection between Brightness
the brightness and the
pupil size of the people?

Pupil size

Example 11.5 Below are three scatter graphs. Describe the relationships in each graph.

Hours of
Rainfall sunshine

Temperature Temperature

The first graph shows a negative

correlation. Here, this means that the
higher the temperature, the less the
Number
rainfall. of fish in
the sea
The second graph shows a positive
correlation. Here, this means that the
higher the temperature, the more hours
of sunshine there are. Temperature

The third graph shows no correlation. Here, this means that there is no connection
between the temperature and the number of fish in the sea.

164
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:07 Page 165

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Exercise 11D A survey is carried out to compare pupils ages with the amount of money that they
spend each week. 6
Age (years) 11 16 14 13 13 18 10 12 14 15
Amount spent 3 3.50 6 5 6.50 12 2.50 4 8 7.50

a Plot the data on a scatter graph. Use the x-axis for age from 8 to 20 years, and
use the y-axis for amount spent from 0 to 15.
b Describe in words what the graph tells you and what sort of correlation there is.

The table shows how much time pupils spend watching television and how long they
spend on homework per week.

Time watching 12 8 5 7 9 3 5 6 10 14
TV (hours)
Time spent on 4 7 10 6 5 11 9 6 6 3
homework (hours)

a Plot the data on a scatter graph (take the axes as time spent on TV and
homework, from 0 to 15 hours).
b Describe in words what the graph tells you and what sort of correlation there is.

A car changes hands every year. The table shows the selling price and the age of the car.
LE
FOR SA
Age (years) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Selling price 10 000 8300 7500 6000 5300 4200 3400

a Plot the data on a scatter graph. Use the x-axis for age from 0 to 10 years, and
use the y-axis for price from 1000 to 11 000.
b Describe in words what the graph tells you about the cars value as it gets older.

Put two columns in your exercise book. Write down pairs of events that have
negative, positive or no correlation. In each case indicate the type of correlation.

Analysing data
Suppose that you want to put
Height

Height

some data into the form of

+
+

+
+
+

10 20 30 40 50
+

+
+

diagrams or tables. How do 10 20 30 40 50

you choose which form to use? 12%

9%

Ask yourself a few questions. 10%

11%
58%

Will my diagram be easy Chart

to understand? If I use a pie

chart, will there be too many
sectors? Am I comparing two
sets of data?

165
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:07 Page 166

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Exercise 11E

7 For each question below, write down whether the best way to collect data is by:


Observation
Questionnaire
Controlled experiment
Data from textbooks, newspapers or the Internet
a Do more men attend sports events than women?
b Does it always snow in December?
c Is a dice fair?
d Which soap powder is most popular?
e What percentage of 13-year-old children have mobile phones?
f How popular is a particular restaurant?
g How many people have had an
illness in the past 2 months?
h Do Year 8 girls prefer Brad Pitt or Tom Cruise?
i How many people visit a shopping centre
on a Sunday?
j How many lorries use a road between
8.00 am and 9.00 am?

Now you are ready to analyse and write a report

on the data that you collected for Exercise 11A.
Your report should consist of the following.
A brief statement of what you expect to show: this is called a hypothesis
A section that explains how you collected your data
A copy of any questionnaires you may have used
Completed data-collection sheets or tally charts
Suitable diagrams to illustrate your data
Calculated statistics, such as mean, median, mode and range
A brief conclusion that refers back to your hypothesis
You may wish to use the following sorts of diagrams as you think appropriate: bar
charts, pie charts, stem-and-leaf diagrams, scatter graphs.

The extension work is to finish writing up your report, including as much

detail as possible using the guidelines given in this chapter.

6 I can use, collect and record continuous data.

I can construct pie charts.
I can draw conclusions from scatter graphs, and have a basic understanding of correlation.

7
I know how to generate a detailed solution to a given problem.
I can critically examine a mathematical diagram.

166
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:07 Page 167

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

1 2001 Paper 1
Wear glasses
There are 60 students in a school. 6 of these students wear glasses.

a The pie chart is not drawn accurately.

What should the angles be? Show your working.

b Exactly half of the 60 students in the school are boys. Do not wear
From this information, is the percentage of boys in this school that glasses
wear glasses 5%, 6%, 10%, 20%, 50% or not possible to tell?

2 2001 Paper 2
A teacher asked two different classes: What type of book is your favourite?

a Results from class A (total 20 pupils): Type of book Frequency

Draw a pie chart to show this information. Crime 3
Show your working and draw your angles Non-fiction 13
accurately.
Fantasy 4

b The pie chart on the right shows the results from all of class B. Class B
Each pupil had only one vote.
Crime
Romance
The sector for non-fiction represents 11 pupils.
How many pupils are in class B? Fantasy
165
Show your working.
Non-fiction

3 2005 Paper 1
Bumps are built on a road to slow cars down.
The stem-and-leaf diagrams show the speeds of 15 cars before and after the bumps were built.
6
Before After
Key:
2 2 3 4 4
2 | 3 means 23 miles per hour
2 7 8 2 6 6 7 8 8 9
3 0 2 4 3 0 0 0 1 2
3 5 6 8 9 3 5
4 1 3 4 4 4 4
4 6 4

a Copy the sentences below and use the diagrams to write in the missing numbers.
Before the bumps:
The maximum speed was mph, and cars went at more than 30 mph.
After the bumps:
The maximum speed was mph, and cars went at more than 30 mph.

b Show that the median speed fell by 10 mph.

167
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:07 Page 168

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

4 2007 Paper 1

7 Chris read the first 55 numbers from a book of random numbers.

As he read each number he recorded it in the diagram below.

0 5 9 9 8 3 4 1 Key:
1 6 3 1 0 3
2 8 2 1 | 3 represents 13
3 1 1 6 9 3
4 6 9 9 4 7 0
5 5 7 7 6
6 0 2 8 4 8 0 3 5
7 6 8 0 1 5 4
8 6 6 9 2 8 5 7
9 6 7 8 0 0

a What was the largest number he recorded?

b Explain how Chris could change the diagram to make it easier for him to find the median of his data set.

5 2006 Paper 1
6 5 9 Key:
A teacher asked 21 pupils to 7 0 2 6 8 8
estimate the height of a building 8 3 3 5 7 7 9 6 | 5 represents 6.5 m
in metres. 9 0 5 5 5
10 4 8
The stem-and-leaf diagram
shows all 21 results. 11 2 7

a Show that the range of estimated heights was 5.2 m.

b What was the median estimated height?
c The height of the building was 9.2 m.
What percentage of the pupils
over-estimated the height? 1000

6 2006 Paper 2 900

Field voles are small animals that

800
do not live for very long.
A scientist recorded data on 1000 700
of these voles that were born on
Number of voles still alive

the same day.

600
The graph shows how many voles
were still alive after a number of 500
weeks.
Use the graph to answer this 400
question.
Estimate the probability that a field 300
vole will live to be at least 20
weeks old. 200

100

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Number of weeks

168
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:07 Page 169

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

7 2006 Paper 1
Car tyres are checked for safety by measuring
the tread.
6

5
7
The tread on a tyre and the distance travelled by
that tyre were recorded for a sample of tyres.
The scatter graph shows the results. 4

Tread (mm)
Tyres with a tread of less than 1.6 mm are
3
illegal.
Suppose the government changes this rule to
2
less than 2.5 mm.

a How many of these tyres would now be 1

illegal?

b About how many fewer kilometres would 0

0 10000 20000 30000 40000
you expect a tyre to last before it was illegal?
Distance (km)

8 2005 Paper 1 y
A pupil investigated whether students who study more 40
watch less television.

Number of hours watching

television in one week
The scatter graph shows his results. The line of best fit 30
is also shown.

a What type of correlation does the graph show? 20

b The pupil says the equation of the line of best fit is
y = x + 40 10
Explain how you can tell that this equation is
wrong.
0 x
0 10 20 30 40
Number of hours
studying in one week

169
FM Ch 11 Football PB 8.3 30/4/08 17:20 Page 170

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Functional Maths

Football attendances

The Sheffield football teams have had various support

over the years as they have moved in and out of the
divisions. Below is a table comparing their attendances
over the years 1989 to 2007.

Sheffield Wednesday Sheffield United

Year Level Place Attendance Level Place Attendance
1989 1 15 20 035 3 2 12 279
1990 1 18 20 928 2 2 17 008
1991 2 3 26 196 1 13 21 609
1992 1 3 29 578 1 9 21 805
1993 1 7 27 264 1 14 18 985
1994 1 7 27 187 1 20 19 562
1995 1 13 26 596 2 8 14 408
1996 1 15 24 877 2 9 12 904
1997 1 7 25 714 2 5 16 675
1998 1 13 28 706 2 6 17 936
1999 1 12 26 745 2 8 16 258
2000 1 19 24 855 2 16 13 700
2001 2 17 19 268 2 10 17 211
2002 2 20 20 882 2 13 18 031
2003 2 21 20 327 2 3 18 073
2004 3 16 22 336 2 8 21 646
2005 3 5 23 100 2 8 19 594
2006 2 19 24 853 2 2 23 650
2007 2 9 23 638 1 18 30 512

Use this information to answer the questions.

1 What is the median average

attendance of each team?

2 What is the mean level played at by

each team during these years?

170
FM Ch 11 Football PB 8.3 30/4/08 17:20 Page 171

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

3 What is the mean average attendance

for each team during the years shown?

4 Find the total of the average

attendances for both Sheffield teams
for every year and make a suitable
comment.

5 Put the data into a grouped bar chart

showing the number of times the
average attendances were in the
bands 10 00015 000, 15 00120 000,
20 00125 000, 25 00130 000,
30 00135 000.

6 Illustrate the data in the tables in pie

charts to show the differences
between the two clubs in regards to
levels played and average
attendances.

7 Draw frequency graphs to illustrate

how both teams average attendance
has changed over the years.

8 Draw one frequency graph to illustrate

how both teams average attendance
has changed while at the same time
clearly showing at what level each
team is playing.

171
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:08 Page 172

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

CHAPTER 12 Number 4
This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
How to add and subtract How to add and subtract
fractions with any denominators fractions with the same
How to use BODMAS with more denominator
complex problems How to find equivalent fractions
How to solve problems using How to use the four operations
decimals, fractions, with decimals
percentages and units of
measurement

Fractions
This section recalls some of the rules you have already met about fractions.

Example 12.1 a How many sevenths are in 4 whole ones?

b How many fifths are in 335 ?
a There are 7 sevenths in a whole one, so there are 4 7 = 28 sevenths in 4
whole ones.
b There are 3 5 = 15 fifths in 3 whole ones, so there are 15 + 3 = 18 fifths in 335 .

Example 12.2 Write the following as mixed numbers.

48
a
15 b The fraction of a kilometre given by 3150 metres
48 3 1
a 48 15 = 3 remainder 3, so 15 = 3
15 , which can cancel to 3 5 .

Note: It is usually easier to cancel after the fraction has been written as a mixed
number rather than before.
3150 150 3
b 1 kilometre is 1000 metres, so the fraction is
1000 = 3 1000
= 3
20

Exercise 12A Find the missing number in each of these fractions.

a 5=1 b 9=1 c 25 = 1
3 9 8 16 9 27
d 8=1 e 12 = 48 f 20 = 80
5 15 7 9
1 1
g 11 = 1 h 7=1 i 13 = 52
6 18 2 6 3
1

172
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:08 Page 173

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

a
c
How many sixths are in 3 56 ?
How many tenths are in 2 52 ?
b
d
How many eighths are in 4 21 ?
How many ninths are in 5 79 ? 6
Write each mixed number in Question 2 as a top-heavy fraction in its simplest form.

Write each of the following as a mixed number in its simplest form.

14 15 24 35 28 70
a 12 b 9 c 21 d 20 e 20 f 50
28 26 44 32 36 75
g 24 h 12 i 24 j 10 k 24 l 35

Write these fractions as mixed numbers (cancel down if necessary).

a Seven thirds b Sixteen sevenths c Twelve fifths d Nine halves
20
e 7 f 245 g 13
3 h 198 i 146
12 j 10 78
k 52
12 l 102
9

Write the following fractions.

a The fraction of an hour given by the turn of the minute hand round a clock as it
12 goes from:
11 1
10 2 i 7:15 to 9:45 ii 8:25 to 10:10 iii 6:12 to 7:24
9 3 iv 8:55 to 10:45 v 7:05 to 10:20 vi 9:36 to 11:24
8 Bloggs 4 b The fraction of a metre given by:
7 5 i 715 cm ii 2300 mm iii 405 cm
6
iv 580 cm v 1550 mm vi 225 cm
c The fraction of a kilogram given by:
i 2300 g ii 4050 g iii 7500 g
iv 5600 g v 1225 g vi 6580 g

A gallon is an imperial unit of capacity still in common use in the UK. There
are 8 pints in a gallon. A litre is about 143 pints and a gallon is about 412 litres.
Write the missing mixed numbers to make these statements true.
1 2 litres = pints 2 10 pints = gallons 3 5 gallons = litres
4 3 litres = pints 5 3 gallons = litres 6 20 pints = gallons

Adding and subtracting fractions

This section will give you more practice with adding and subtracting fractions.

Example 12.3 Work out:

a 38 + 114 b 178 34
Previously, we used a fraction chart or line to do these. A fraction line is drawn below.

0 1 2 3 4 5

a Start at 0 and count on 38, then 1 and then 14 to

give 38 + 114 = 158. 0 1 2

b Start at 178 and count back 34 to give 178 34 = 118.

0 1 2

173
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:08 Page 174

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

When denominators are not the same, they must be made the same before the
numerators are added or subtracted. To do this, we need to find the lowest common
multiple (LCM) of the denominators.

Example 12.4 Work out:

2 1 9
a
9 + 15
b 114
56
a The LCM of 9 and 15 is 45, so the two fractions need to be written as forty-fifths:
2 1

9+ 15
= 10
3
13
45 + 45 = 45

b The LCM of 14 and 6 is 42, so the two fractions need to be written as forty-
seconds. The mixed number needs to be made into a top-heavy fraction.
23 5
69 35 34 17
6 = 42 42 = 42 = 21

14

6 Exercise 12B Work out the following. The eighths fraction line given earlier may help.
a 7
8 + 1
4 b 1 38 + 3
4 c 2 34 + 5
8 d 3
4 + 1 18 + 1 38
7 1
e 8 4 f 2 83 3
4 g 2 34 1 81 h 1 38 + 1 12 1 14

Convert the following fractions to equivalent fractions with a common denominator.

Then work out the answer. Cancel down or write as a mixed number if appropriate.
1 3 5 1 3 3 5 5
a 8 + 5 b 7 + 4 c 14 + 8 d 9 + 6
5 3
e 12 + 10 f 1 38 + 1
6 g 7
1 12 + 1
8 h 1 34 + 1 31 + 5
12
3 1 5 1 3 1 5 1
i 5 8 j 7 4 k 14 4 l 9 6
5 1
m 12 10 n 1 78 5
14 o 7
1 12 1
8 p 1 34 + 1 14
3
5
8

1 1
A magazine has 3 of its pages for advertising, 12 for letters and the rest for articles.
a What fraction of the pages is for articles?
b If the magazine has 120 pages, how many are used for articles?
1 2
A survey of pupils showed that 5 of them walked to school, 3 came by bus and the
rest came by car.
a What fraction came by car?
b If there were 900 pupils in the school, how many came by car?
2 3
A farmer plants 7 of his land with wheat and 8 with maize. The rest is used for cattle.
a What fraction of the land is used to grow crops?
b What fraction is used for cattle?

Consider the series 12 + 14 + 18 + 16

1 1
+ 32 1
+ 64
1
+ 128
If we write down the first
term, then add the first two terms, then add the first three terms, we obtain
the series 12, 34, 78,
a Continue this sequence for another four terms.
b What total will the series reach if it continues for an infinite number of terms?
c Repeat with the series 13 + 19 + 1

27 + 1

81
1
+ 243 1
+ 729
1
+ 2187

174
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:08 Page 175

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Order of operations

B Brackets B Brackets
O pOwers I Indices
DM Division and Multiplication DM Division and Multiplication
AS Addition and Subtraction AS Addition and Subtraction

BODMAS and BIDMAS are ways of remembering the order in which mathematical
operations are carried out.

Example 12.5 Evaluate:

a 2 32 + 6 2 b (2 + 3)2 8 6
Show each step of the calculation.

a Firstly, work out the power or index number, which gives 29+62
Secondly, the division, which gives 29+3
Thirdly, the multiplication, which gives 18 + 3
Finally, the addition to give 21
b Firstly, work out the bracket, which gives 52 8 6
Secondly, the power or index number, which gives 25 8 6
Thirdly, the multiplication, which gives 200 6
Finally, the subtraction to give 194
Note: If we have a calculation that is a string of additions and subtractions, or a
string of multiplications and divisions, then we do the calculation from left to right.

Example 12.6 Calculate:

a (2 + 6)2
b 3.1 + [4.2 (1.7+ 1.5) 1.6]
2 42

a (2 + 6)2 =
82 = 64 = 2
24 2
2 16 32
b 3.1 + [4.2 (1.7 + 1.5) 1.6] = 3.1 + (4.2 3.2 1.6)
= 3.1 + (4.2 2)
= 3.1 + 2.2
= 5.3
Note: If there are nested brackets, then the inside ones are calculated first.

175
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:08 Page 176

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Exercise 12C Write the operation that you do first in each of these calculations, and then work out
each one.
a 5+47 b 18 6 3
c 77+2 d 16 4 2
e (5 + 4) 7 f (18 6) 3
g 7 (7 + 2) h 16 (4 2)
i 5+972 j 2634
k 12 15 + 7 l 12 3 6 2

Work out the following, showing each step of the calculation.

a 3 + 4 + 42 b 3 + (4 + 4)2 c 3 4 + 42 d 3 (4 + 4)2
e 5 + 32 7 f (5 + 3)2 7 g 2 62 + 2 h 2 (62 + 2)
i 200
j 80 + 20
k (42 + 32) l (2 + 3)2

45 45 61
m 3.2 (5.4 + 6.1) + (5.7 2.1) n 8 (12 4) (2 2)

Write out each of the following and insert brackets to make the calculation true.
a 3 7 + 1 = 24 b 3 + 7 2 = 20
c 2 3 + 1 4 = 32 d 2 + 32 = 25
e 5 5 + 5 5 = 26 f 5 5 + 5 5 = 10
g 5 5 + 5 5 = 30 h 55+55=6
i 15 32 = 144

Work out the following (calculate the inside bracket first).

a 120 [25 (3 2)] b 120 (25 3 2)
c 5 + [8 (6 3)] d 5 + (8 6 3)
e [120 (60 20)] + 20 f (120 60 20) + 20
g [120 (20 4)] + 3 h (120 20 4) + 3
i [(3 + 4)2 5] 2

By putting brackets in different places, one calculation can be made to give

many different answers. For example, without brackets:
4 6 + 4 3 8 + 1 = 24 + 4 24 + 1 = 5
With brackets, this could be:
4 (6 + 4) 3 (8 + 1) = 4 10 3 9 = 40 27 = 13
1 By putting brackets into the appropriate places in the same calculation,
obtain answers of:
a 33 b 17 c 252
2 Similarly, put brackets into 12 6 2 1 + 5 3 to make:
a 54 b 15 c 0

176
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:08 Page 177

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Multiplying decimals
This section will give you more practice on multiplying integers and decimals.

Example 12.7 Find:

a 0.03 0.05 b 900 0.004 c 50 0.04 0.008
a 3 5 = 15. There are four decimal places in the multiplication, so there are four
in the answer. Therefore 0.03 0.05 = 0.0015
b Rewrite as equivalent products, i.e. 900 0.004 = 90 0.04 = 9 0.4 = 3.6
c Do this in two parts. Firstly, 50 0.04 = 5 0.4 = 2. Then rewrite 2 0.008 as
2 8 = 16 but with three decimal places in the answer.
So 50 0.04 0.008 = 0.016

Example 12.8 Without a calculator, work out 13.4 0.63.

There are many ways to do this. Three are shown. In all cases you should first
estimate the answer:
13.4 0.63 13 0.6 = 1.3 6 = 7.8
Remember also that there are three decimal places in the product (13.4 0.63), so
there will be three in the answer.
In two methods the decimal points are ignored and put back into the answer.
Column method 134 Box method 1 100 30 4 Total
63 60 6000 1800 240 8040

402 3 300 90 12 402
8040
Total 8442
8442

Box method 2 10 3 0.4 Total
0.6 6 1.8 0.24 8.04
0.03 0.3 0.09 0.012 0.402
Total 8.442
By all three methods the answer is 13.4 0.63 = 8.442

Exercise 12D Without using a calculator, work out the following.

a 400 0.5 b 0.07 200 6
c 0.3 400 d 0.06 500
e 0.07 400 f 0.008 200
g 0.005 700 h 0.003 4000
i 0.004 7000 j 300 0.009
k 900 0.01 l 900 0.04
m 600 0.1 n 700 0.01
o 800 0.001 p 900 0.0001

177
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:08 Page 178

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Without using a calculator, work out the following.

6 a
b
0.002 500 300
0.03 0.04 60 000
c 0.4 0.02 800
d 400 600 0.05
e 40 0.006 20
f 0.3 0.08 4000

Without using a calculator, work out the answers to the following. Use any method
you are happy with.
a 73 9.4
b 5.82 4.5
c 12.3 2.7
d 1.24 10.3
e 2.78 0.51
f 12.6 0.15
g 2.63 6.5
h 0.68 0.42

A rectangle is 2.46 m by 0.67 m. What is the area of the rectangle?

1 Work out:
a 1.22 b 1.72 c 1.72 1.22 d 0.5 2.9
2 Work out:
a 1.52 b 2.12 c 2.12 1.52 d 0.6 3.6
3 Look for a connection between the calculations in parts c and d of 1 and 2.
Then write down the answer to 3.12 2.12. Check your answer with a calculator.

Dividing decimals
This section will give you more practice on dividing integers and decimals.

Example 12.9 Work out:

a 0.12 0.03 b 600 0.15
a Simplify the division by rewriting as equivalent divisions. In this case, multiply
both numbers by 10 until the divisor (0.03) becomes a simple whole number
(3). This is equivalent to shifting the decimal point to the right by the same
amount in both numbers. So:
0.12 0.03 = 1.2 0.3 = 12 3 = 4
b Rewriting as equivalent divisions:
600 0.15 = 6000 1.5 = 60 000 15 = 4000

178
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:08 Page 179

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 12.10 Work out:

a 32.8 40 b 7.6 800
a Simplify the division by rewriting as equivalent divisions. In this case, divide
both numbers by 10 until the divisor (40) becomes a simple whole number (4).
This is equivalent to shifting the decimal point to the left by the same amount in
both numbers. So:
32.8 40 = 3.28 4 = 0.82
It may be easier to set this out as a short division problem:
0.82

4 / 3.28
b Rewriting as equivalent divisions:
7.6 800 = 0.76 80 = 0.076 8 = 0.0095
As a short division problem:
0.0095

8 / 0.07640

Example 12.11 Work out: 4.32 1.2

First estimate the answer: 4.32 1.2 4 1 = 4
Write without the decimal points, i.e. 432 12, and use repeated subtraction
(chunking):
432
360 (30 12)

72
72 (6 12)

0 (36 12)
The answer is 4.32 1.2 = 3.6

Exercise 12E Without using a calculator, work out the following.

a 0.36 0.02 b 0.48 0.5 6
c 0.45 0.02 d 0.18 0.03
e 0.24 0.02 f 0.48 0.3
g 0.39 0.3 h 0.24 0.05

Without using a calculator, work out the following.

a 600 0.4 b 500 0.25
c 300 0.08 d 300 0.02
e 60 0.015 f 60 0.25
g 500 0.02 h 40 0.25

179
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:08 Page 180

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

6 Without using a calculator, work out the following.

a
c
3.2 40
24 400
b
d
2.8 400
36 90
e 4.8 80 f 4.8 200
g 3.5 700 h 0.16 400

Without using a calculator, work out the following. Use any method you are happy
with.
a 3.36 1.4 b 1.56 2.4
c 5.688 3.6 d 20.28 5.2
e 22.23 6.5 f 2.89 3.4
g 5.75 23 h 2.304 0.24

A rectangle has an area of 3.915 cm2.

The length is 2.7 cm. Calculate the width.

1 Given that 46 34 = 1564, work out:

a 4.6 17 b 2.3 1.7
c 1564 0.34 d 15.64 0.23
2 Given that 39 32 = 1248, work out:
a 3.9 16 b 0.13 32
c 3900 0.08 d 0.0039 32
3 Given that 2.8 0.55 = 1.540, work out:
a 14 55 b 154 11
c 15.4 0.28 d 0.014 5500

5 I can simplify fractions by cancelling common factors.

I can add and subtract simple fractions.
I know the correct order of operations, including using brackets.
I can multiply simple decimals without using a calculator.

6 I can add and subtract fractions by writing them with a common denominator.
I can multiply and divide decimals.

7 I know the effect of multiplying and dividing by numbers between 0 and 1.

I can solve problems involving multiplication and division of numbers of any size.

180
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:08 Page 181

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

1 2005 Paper 2
Use your calculator to work out the answers.
(48 + 57) (61 19) =
48 + 57 =

61 19

2 2005 Paper 1
How many eighths are there in one quarter?
Now work out 3
4 + 1
8
6
3 2007 Paper 1
Copy these fraction sums and write in the missing numbers.

1 1 8
+ = 1 + = 1
4 8 3

4 2004 Paper 2
Some numbers are smaller than their squares.
For example: 7 < 7 2
7
Which numbers are equal to their squares?

181
FM Ch 12 Supermarket PB 8.3 30/4/08 17:21 Page 182

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Functional Maths

Shopping for bargains

a How many litres would you need to buy to

1 collect a voucher?
b Petrol is 1.20 a litre.
How much would you spend on petrol
before you receive a voucher?
c Estimate the number of weeks it would
take to receive a voucher if you use an
average of 30 litres of petrol each week.
d The saving is equivalent to 1.5p per litre.
Work out the percentage saving per litre.

Here is some information about three business

3 people and their company cars.

Car Annual distance CO2 emissions

fuel travelled (km) (grams per km)
Managing director Diesel 14 000 140
Secretary Petrol 8 000 200
Delivery driver Diesel 22 000 110
Nina uses an average of 40 litres of diesel
2 each week. Diesel is 1.30 per litre.
The company wants to encourage each
a How much does she spend on diesel each person to reduce the CO2 emissions.
week? a Work out the annual amount of CO2
b Her car uses 1 litre of diesel for every emissions for each car.
14 miles travelled. If Nina drives 140 fewer Give your answer in kilograms.
miles each week, how much will she save
b The company wants each person to reduce
each week?
the CO2 emissions by reducing each
c If the price of diesel goes up by 10p a litre, persons travelling by 15%.
how much more would she spend on Work out the reduction in CO2 emissions
diesel in a year (52 weeks)? for each car.
d Work out the percentage increase. Give your answer in kilograms.

182
FM Ch 12 Supermarket PB 8.3 30/4/08 17:21 Page 183

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Chocolate
Only 1 Was 1.19 Mint sauce
3 for 2 Normally 85p each

Almost Butter
Buy one get one free 1.38
Milk
ch
2 for 2 or 1.25 ea
Cheese
Save 1 was 3.25

Scotch eggs
Were 1.15 Save 20% Now 92p
Grillsteaks
520g Half price
1.49
Was 2.99 Now Baby shampo o
Save 1 Was 2.47 Now 1
3 .64
Luxury Crisps
2 for 2.50 1.49 each Yoghurts
3 free
48p each Buy 3 get

You decide to take up all the offers shown.

5
a How much will you save on each offer
compared with the full price?

You have 20 to spend but you b How much will you save altogether?
4 have to buy, bread, coffee, baked
beans and orange juice.
a How much do these four items cost
altogether? The shopping can be ordered on the Internet
6 and delivered to your home.
b How much does this leave you to spend on
other items? The delivery charge is 4.50.
c Using the offers, make two different The journey to the supermarket and back is
shopping lists of items you could now 8 miles altogether.
afford to buy. Try to spend as close to 20
It costs 60p per mile to run your car.
altogether as possible. (Hint: You can buy
single items but then you would not get the Explain the advantages and disadvantages of
offer price.) having the shopping delivered.

183
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:08 Page 184

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

CHAPTER 13 Algebra 5
This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
How to expand and then How to solve simple equations
simplify expressions How to use the arithmetic of
How to solve a range of linear negative numbers
equations How to find the gradient of a
How to solve equations by trial line
and improvement
How to construct equations and
solve them
How to work with negative
gradients
How to change the subject of a
formula

Expand and simplify

In algebra we often have to rearrange expressions and equations. You have met two
methods for doing this before: expansion and simplification.
Expansion means removing the brackets from an expression by multiplying each term
inside the brackets by the term outside the brackets. When a negative term multiplies a
bracket, it changes all the signs in the bracket.
Simplification means collecting like terms so as to write an expression as simply as
possible. Sometimes you need to expand brackets first, then simplify.

Example 13.1 Expand:

a 2(x + 3y) b m(5p 2)
a 2(x + 3y) = 2x + 6y
b m(5p 2) = 5mp 2m

Example 13.2 Expand:

a 4 (a + b) b 10 (2x 3y) c T 3(2m + 4n)
a 4 (a + b) = 4 a b
b 10 (2x 3y) = 10 2x + 3y
c T 3(2m + 4n) = T 6m 12n

184
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:08 Page 185

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 13.3 Simplify:

a 5a + b + 2a + 5b b 4c + 3d c 2d c 4x 2y + 2x 3y
a 5a + b + 2a + 5b = 7a + 6b
b 4c + 3d c 2d = 3c + d
c 4x 2y + 2x 3y = 6x 5y

Example 13.4 Expand and simplify:

a 3a + c + 2(a + 3c) b 10t 3(2t 4m)
a 3a + c + 2(a + 3c) = 3a + c + 2a + 6c = 5a + 7c
b 10t 3(2t 4m) = 10t 6t + 12m = 4t + 12m

Exercise 13A Simplify the following.

a 3m + 2k + m b 2p + 3q + 5p c 4t + 3d t d 5k + g 2k
4
e 5p + 2p + 3m f 2w + 5w + k g m + 3m 2k h 3x + 5x 4t
i 3k + 4m + 2m j 2t + 3w + w k 5x + 6m 2m l 4y 2p + 5p

Expand the following.

a 3(2a + 3b) b 2(4t 3k) c 5(n + 3p) d 4(2q p)
e a(3 + t) f b(4 + 3m) g x(5y t) h y(3x 2n)
i a(m + n) j a(3p t) k x(6 + 3y) l t(2k p)

Expand and simplify the following.

a
d
3x + 2(4x + 5)
4x + 2(3x 4)
b
e
8a 3(2a + 5)
5t 4(2t 3)
c
f
12t 2(3t 4)
12m 2(4m 5)
6
g 6(2k + 3) 5k h 5(3n 2) 4n i 2(6x + 5) 7x

Expand and simplify the following.

a 2(3k + 4) + 3(4k + 2) b 5(2x + 1) + 2(3x + 5) c 3(5m + 2) + 4(3m + 1)
d 5(2k + 3) 2(k + 3) e 4(3t + 4) 3(5t + 4) f 2(6k + 7) 3(2k + 3)
g 4(3 + 2m) 2(5 + m) h 5(4 + 3d) 3(4 + 2d) i 3(5 + 4k) 2(3 + 5k)

Solve the following equations.

a 3(x + 1) + 2(x 1) = 21 b 4(x + 3) + 3(x 2) = 41
c 4(2x + 1) + 5(3x + 2) = 83 d 5(2x + 3) 2(3x + 1) = 29
e 4(6x + 5) 2(4x + 3) = 54 f 3(4x + 5) 5(2x 3) = 37

Solve the following equations.

a 6x + 7 = 2

4x 1
b 4x + 5 2 = 0

x+6
c 11
2x = 1.2
1 4x
7

185
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:08 Page 186

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

6 In a magic square, each row and each column

add up to the same amount. x+m x+ym xy
Show that the square opposite is a magic square.

xym x x+y+m

x+y xy+m xm

Solving equations by trial and improvement

So far, the equations you have met have been linear. This means that they do not contain
powers of the variable. They are solved by adding, subtracting, multiplying or dividing
both sides of the equation by the same terms.
Equations that do contain powers are called non-linear. Sometimes they are solved by
trial and improvement. The aim is to find a close approximation to the solution.

Example 13.5 Solve the equation x2 + x = 34 to one decimal place.

Try an integer to start with.
2
Try x = 5: the left-hand side (LHS) of the equation is 5 + 5 = 30, which is too small.

Try a bigger integer.

2
Try x = 6: the LHS is 6 + 6 = 42, which is too big.

So the solution lies between 5 and 6. Try the middle of this range.
2
Try x = 5.5: the LHS is 5.5 + 5.5 = 35.75, which is too big (the next guess should
be smaller).
2
Try x = 5.3: the LHS is 5.3 + 5.3 = 33.39, which is too small.
2
Try x = 5.4: the LHS is 5.4 + 5.4 = 34.56, which is too big.

So the solution lies between 5.3 and 5.4. One of these is the answer correct to
1 dp. Try the middle of this range.
2
Try x = 5.35: the LHS is 5.35 + 5.35 = 33.9725 which is too small.

So the solution is bigger than 5.35 but smaller than 5.4. All of the numbers in this
range round up to 5.4. So the solution is x = 5.4 correct to 1 dp.
The table summarises the calculations. You should make a table for each equation
you solve.
x x2 + x Comment
5 52 + 5 = 30 too small
6 62 + 6 = 42 too big (so x lies between 5 and 6)
5.5 5.52 + 5.5 = 35.75 too big
5.3 5.32 + 5.3 = 33.39 too small
5.4 5.42 + 5.4 = 34.56 too big (so x lies between 5.3 and 5.4)
5.35 5.352 + 5.35 = 33.9725 too small (so x rounds up to 5.4)

186
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:08 Page 187

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 13.6 Find a positive solution to the equation x3 + x = 52 to one decimal place.
The solution can be followed in the table.
x x3 + x Comment
4 43 + 4 = 68 too big
3 33 + 3 = 30 too small (so x lies between 3 and 4)
3.5 3.53 + 3.5 = 46.375 too small
3.7 3.73 + 3.7 = 54.353 too big
3.6 3.63 + 3.6 = 50.256 too small (so x lies between 3.6 and 3.7)
3.65 3.653 + 3.65 = 52.277 too big (so x rounds down to 3.6)
The solution is x = 3.6 to 1 dp.

Exercise 13B The solutions of each of the following equations lie between two consecutive
integers. In each case, make a table and find the integers.
a 2
x + x = 60 b 2
x x = 40 c 2
x + x = 120
7
d x3 + x = 25 e x3 x = 75 f x3 + x = 150

The solutions of each of the following equations lie between two consecutive
numbers with one decimal place. In each case, make a table and find the numbers.
a x2 + x = 75 b x2 x = 17 c x2 + x = 115
d x3 + x = 53 e x3 x = 76 f x3 + x = 140

Jess and Paul both solved the equation x3 + x = 74 by trial and improvement.
However, they used different methods, as shown in the tables.

Jess Paul
3 3
x x +x Comment x x +x Comment
4 68.00 too small 4 68.00 too small
4.1 73.02 too small 5 130.00 too big
4.2 78.29 too big 4.5 95.63 too big
4.11 73.54 too small 4.2 78.29 too big
4.12 74.05 too big 4.1 73.02 too small
4.111 73.59 too small 4.15 75.62 too big
4.112 73.64 too small 4.12 74.05 too big
4.113 73.69 too small 4.11 73.54 too small
4.114 73.74 too small 4.115 73.80 too small
4.115 73.80 too small 4.118 73.95 too small
4.116 73.85 too small 4.119 74.00 its there
4.117 73.90 too small
4.118 73.95 too small
4.119 74.00 spot on
The answer is x = 4.119. The solution is x = 4.119.

187
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:08 Page 188

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Explain which of the two methods is more efficient for:

7 a finding the solution to one decimal place.
b finding the solution to two decimal places.
c finding the solution to three decimal places.

Use a spreadsheet to find the solutions to the equation x3 10x2 + 26x = 19

to one decimal place. There are three positive solutions between 0 and 10.

Constructing equations
The first step in solving a problem with algebra is to write or construct an equation.
You need to choose a letter to stand for each variable in the problem. This might be x or
the first letter of a suitable word. For example, t is often used to stand for time.

Example 13.7 I think of a number, add 7 to it, multiply it by 5, and get the answer 60. What is the
number I first thought of?
Let my number be x:
Add 7 to it gives x + 7
Multiply it by 5 gives 5(x + 7)
I get the answer 60 allows us to construct the equation 5(x + 7) = 60
We can solve this now:
5(x + 7) = 60
Divide both sides by 5: x + 7 = 12
Subtract 7 from both sides: x=5

Exercise 13C Write an expression for each of the following.

a Two numbers add up to 100. If one of the numbers is x, write an expression for
the other.
b The difference between two numbers is 8. If the smaller of the two numbers is y,
write an expression for the larger number.
c Jim and Ann have 18 marbles between them. If Jim has p marbles, how many
marbles has Ann?
d Lenny rides a bike at an average speed of 8 km/h. Write an expression for the
distance he travels in t hours.
e If n is an even number, find an expression for the next consecutive even number.

6 Solve each of the following problems by constructing an equation and then solving it.
a A mother is four times as old as her son now. The mothers age is 48 years. Find
the sons age. Let the sons age be x years.
b If n is an odd number:
i Write an expression for the sum of the next three consecutive odd numbers.
ii If the sum of these four numbers is 32, find n.

188
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:08 Page 189

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

c The sum of two consecutive even numbers is 54. Find the numbers. Let the

d
smaller number be n.
If the sum of two consecutive odd numbers is 208, what are the numbers? Let
6
the smaller number be n.
e John weighs 3 kg more than his brother. The total weight is 185 kg. How much
does John weigh? Let Johns weight be w kg.
f Joys Auntie Mary is four times as old as Joy. If the sum of their ages is 70, find
their ages. Let Joy be x years old.
g A teacher bought 20 books in a sale. Some cost 8 each and the others cost 3
each. She spent 110 in all. How many of the 8 books did she buy? Let x be
the number of 8 books she bought.
h The sum of six consecutive even numbers is 174. What is the smallest of the
numbers? Let the smallest number be n.
i The sum of seven consecutive odd numbers is 133. What is the largest of the
numbers? Let the largest number be n.
a
b
c
The sum of two numbers is 56, and their difference is 14. What is their product?
The sum of two numbers is 43, and their product is 450. What is their difference?
The difference of two numbers is 12, and their product is 448. What is their sum?
7
d The sum of two numbers is 11, and twice the first plus half the second is 10.
What is their product?

Carlos wanted to create a cuboid with a volume as close to 180 cm3 as possible.
The length had to be twice the width. The height had to be 3 cm less than the
width. Find the width, length and height that Carlos will have to use to make
his cuboid. Give your answer to two decimal places.
You may find a spreadsheet useful for this.

Problems with graphs

In Chapter 7 it was found that the graph of any linear equation is a straight line.
The equation written in the form y = mx + c gives the gradient m of the line and the
intercept c on the y-axis.
The gradient m of a straight line was defined as the increase in the y coordinate for an
increase of 1 in the x coordinate. It is found by dividing the vertical rise of the line by its
corresponding horizontal run.
The gradient is positive if it runs from the bottom left of the graph to the top right, and
negative if it runs from top left to bottom right.
The intercept c is the value of y when x = 0.
y y y

vertical
rise positive negative
gradient gradient
horizontal run
x x x

189
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:08 Page 190

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

6 Exercise 13D Each diagram shows the horizontal run and the vertical rise of a straight line. Find
the gradient of each line below.
a y b y c y

5 5 5

0 x 0 x 0 x
0 5 0 5 0 5
d y e y f y

5 5 5

0 x 0 x 0 x
0 5 0 5 0 5

Find the gradient and the y-axis intercept of each of the following equations.
a y = 4x + 1 b y = 3x 1 c y = 5x d y = 2x + 3

Write the equation of the line in the form y = mx + c, where:

a m = 3 and c = 2 b m = 4 and c = 3
c m = 2 and c = 5 d m = 4 and c = 1
e m = 4 and c = 0 f m = 0 and c = 8

Find the gradient, the y-axis intercept and the equation of each linear graph
shown below.
a y b y c y

5 5 5

0 x 0 x 0 x
0 5 0 5 0 5
d y e y f y

5 5 5

0 x 0 x 0 x
0 5 0 5 0 5

190
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:08 Page 191

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Look at the following equations.

i
iv
y = 2x + 5
y=2x
ii
v
y = 3x + 2
y + 5 = 3x
iii y = 2x 3
vi y = x
6
Which of the graphs described by these equations satisfy the following conditions?
a Passes through the origin
b Has a gradient of 2
c Passes through the point (0, 2)
d Has a gradient of 1
e Are parallel to each other

1 Draw the following points on a coordinate grid.

i Find the gradient of the line joining the points.
ii Extend the line through the points to cross the y-axis if necessary.
iii Write down the equation of the line that passes through the points.
a (0, 3) and (2, 9) b (2, 5) and (6, 17) c (2, 10) and (3, 4)
d (3, 9) and (5, 3) e (1, 2) and (1, 8) f (3, 8) and (1, 2)
2 For the equations below:
i plot the point where the graph crosses the y-axis.
ii draw a line from that point with the appropriate gradient.
iii label the graph you have drawn.
a y = 2x + 3 b y = 3x 2 c y = 2x + 6

Real-life graphs
Graphs with axes are used to show a relationship between two variables. The variable
that controls the relationship usually goes on the horizontal axis. The variable that
depends on that control goes on the vertical axis.

Example 13.8 Draw a sketch graph to illustrate that a hot cup of tea will take about 20 minutes to
go cold.
The graph is as shown. The two axes needed are temperature and time. Time goes on
the horizontal axis.
The temperature starts hot at 0 minutes, and is at cold after 20 minutes.
The graph needs a negative gradient.
hot
Temperature

cold

0 5 10 15 20
Time (minutes)

191
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:08 Page 192

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

6 Exercise 13E Sketch graphs to illustrate the following descriptions, clearly labelling each axis.
a The more sunshine we have, the hotter it becomes.
b The longer the distance, the longer it takes to travel.
c In 2 hours all the water in a saucer had evaporated.
d My petrol tank starts a journey full, with 40 litres of petrol. When my journey
has finished, 300 km later, my tank has just 5 litres of petrol left in it.
e The more petrol I buy, the more I have to pay.

The graph shows a car parks charges. y

a How much are the car park 6

charges for the following durations.
i 30 minutes 5
ii less than 1 hour
4
iii 2 hours

Cost ()
iv 2 hours 59 minutes 3
v 3 hours 30 minutes
vi 6 hours 2
b How long can I park for:
1
i 1?
ii 2? 0 x
iii 5? 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
c This type of graph is called a step Time (hours)
graph. Explain why it is called this.

A taxis meter reads 2 at the start of every journey. Once 2 miles have been
travelled, an extra 3 is added to the fare. The reading then increases in steps of 3
for each whole mile covered up to 5 miles. For journeys over 5 miles, 1 is added
per extra mile.
a Draw a step graph to show the charges for journeys up to 10 miles.
b How much is charged for the following journeys?
i half a mile
ii 1 mile
iii 3 miles
iv 5 miles
v 6 miles
vi 10 miles

a What is the relationship between the radius r and the circumference C of

a circle?
b Draw a graph to show this relationship. Put r on the horizontal axis and C on
the vertical axis.
c What is the gradient of this line?

192
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:08 Page 193

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Match the four graphs to the

following situations.
a The amount John gets paid against
Graph 1 Graph 2
6
the number of hours he works
b The temperature of an oven against
the time it is switched on
c The amount of tea in a cup as it is
drunk
Graph 3 Graph 4
d The cost of posting a letter
compared to the weight

1 Harry decides to take a bath.

The graph shows the depth of water in the bath.
Match each section of the graph
G
to the events below.
E F
a The bath gets topped up with
H
hot water. D
Depth of water

b Harry lays back for a soak.

c Harry gets in the bath. B C

d The hot and cold tap are

turned on. I
A
e The cold tap is turned off and
only the hot tap is left on.
f Harry washes himself. Time

g The plug is pulled and the bath empties.

h Harry gets out of the bath.
i The hot tap is turned off and Harry gets ready to get in.
2 Draw graphs to show these other bath stories.
a Jade turns the taps on, then starts talking to her friend on the phone. The bath
overflows. Jade rushed back in and pulls the plug.
b Jane decides to wash her dog. She fills the bath with a few inches of water then
puts the dog in. The dog jumps around and whilst being washed splashes most of
the water out of the bath. The plug is then pulled and the small amount of water
left empties out.
c Jake fills the bath then gets in. Then the phone rings and Jake gets out dripping a
lot of water on the floor. He gets back in the bath, finishes his bath, gets out and
pulls the plug.

193
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:08 Page 194

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Change of subject
Look at the following formula:
P = 4a + 2
The formula states the value of the variable P in terms of a.
We say P is the subject of the formula. Often we need to rearrange a formula to make
another variable into the subject.
This is done in a very similar way to how we solve equations. We add, subtract, multiply
or divide both sides of the equation by the same amount until we obtain the new subject.

Example 13.9 Change the formula E = 5t + 3 to make t the subject.

The formula needs altering so that t is on its own on the left-hand side of the
formula.
Subtract 3 from both sides: E 3 = 5t

Divide both sides by 5: E

3=t
5

Turn it round so that t is on the left-hand side: t=E

3
5

Example 13.10 m 1 to express m in terms of N.

Rewrite the formula N =
2

Add 1 to both sides of the equation: m

N + 1 =
2
Multiply both sides by 2: 2(N + 1) = m
Turn it round so that m is on the left-hand side: m = 2(N + 1)

7 Exercise 13F Rewrite each of the following formulae as indicated.

a A = 2k; express k in terms of A
b h express h in terms of A
A = ;
2
c C = 2r; express r in terms of C
d A = 3x + 2; express x in terms of A

Rewrite each of the following formulae as indicated.

a C = D; make D the subject of the formula
b P = 2(a + b); make a the subject of the formula
c S = 3r(h + 1); make h the subject of the formula
d V = r 2h; make h the subject of the formula
e S = 5t + 4; make t the subject of the formula

194
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:08 Page 195

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Given E = 5n + 8:
a
b
Find E when n = 15
Make n the subject of the formula
7
c Find n when E = 23

Given S = a + 3:
a Find S when a = 7
b Make a the subject of the formula
c Find a when S = 24

Given y = 5x 2:
a Find y when x = 2
b Make x the subject of the formula
c Find x when y = 5
R
Given T = :
2
a Find T when R = 20
b Make R the subject of the formula
c Find R when T = 16

Given V = 12r:
a Find V when r = 5
b Make r the subject of the formula
c Find r when V = 36

Use the formula S = 7m + 8 to find the value of m when S = 36.

Use the formula I = PTR

to find the value of T when P = 4, I = 10 and R = 20.
100
h(a + b) to find the value of b when h = 8, a = 3 and A = 60.
Use the formula A =
2

1 The area of a circle is given by A = r2. Make r the subject of the

formula.
2 The volume of a cone is given by V = 13 r 2h. Make r the subject of the
formula.
3 The surface area of a sphere is given by the formula A = 4r2. Make r the
subject of the formula.

195
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:08 Page 196

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

5 I can use algebra to represent a practical situation.

6 I can expand and simplify expressions with brackets.

I can solve linear equations with brackets where the solution may be fractional or negative.
I can solve equations with the unknown value on both sides where the solution may be fractional
or negative.
I can use algebra to set up an equation to represent a practical situation.
I can calculate the gradient of a straight line drawn on a coordinate grid and can distinguish
between a positive and a negative gradient.
I can plot a straight-line graph using the gradientintercept method.
I can draw and interpret graphs that describe real-life situations.

7 I can solve equations involving algebraic fractions.

I can find the equation of a line using the gradientintercept method.
I can change the subject of a formula with at most two variables.

1 2006 Paper 2

6 Multiply out this expression.

Write your answer as simply as possible.
5(x + 2) + 3(7 + x)

2 2007 Paper 2
Jenny wants to multiply out the brackets in the expression 3(2a + 1).
She writes:

3(2a + 1) = 6a + 1

Show why Jenny is wrong.

3 2004 Paper 1

a Rearrange the equations.

b+4=a b=
4d = c d=
m 3 = 4k m=
b Rearrange the equation to make t the subject.

7 5(2 + t) = w

196
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:08 Page 197

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

4 2003 Paper 1
For each part of the question, write down the statement that is true.

a When x is even, When x is even,

7
(x 2)2 is even. (x 2)2 is odd.
Show how you know it is true for all even values of x

b When x is even, When x is even,

(x 1)(x + 1) is even. (x 1)(x + 1) is odd.
Show how you know it is true for all even values of x.

197
FM Ch 13 Timetable PB 8.3 30/4/08 17:22 Page 198

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Functional Maths

Train timetable

Use the timetable to answer the questions.

Sheffield - Barnsley - Huddersfield/Leeds

Mondays to Fridays
G
Sheffield 0516 0536 0550 0614 0636 0649 0704 0725 0736 0751 0808 0836 0851 0908 0936 0951 1008 1036 1051 1108 1136 1151
Meadowhall 0522 0542 0556 0620 0642 0655 0710 0731 0742 0757 0814 0842 0857 0914 0942 0957 1014 1042 1057 1114 1142 1157
Chapeltown 0528 0548 0626 0648 0716 0748 0820 0848 0920 0948 1020 1048 1120 1148
Elsecar 0533 0631 0721 0825 0925 1025 1125
Wombwell 0537 0555 0635 0655 0725 0755 0829 0855 0929 0955 1029 1055 1129 1155
Barnsley 0542 0601 0611 0641 0701 0710 0731 0748 0801 0812 0835 0901 0912k 0935 1001 1012 1035 1101 1112 1135 1201 1212
Dodworth 0607 0707 0807 0907 1007 1107 1207
Silkstone Common 0611 0711 0811 0911 1011 1111 1211
Penistone 0618 0718 0825n 0918 1018 1118 1218
Denby Dale 0625 0724 0831 0924 1024 1124 1224
Shepley 0630 0729 0836 0929 1029 1129 1229
Stocksmoor 0632 0732 0839 0932 1032 1132 1232
Brockholes 06360 0736 0843 0936 1036 1136 1236
Honley 639 0738 0845 0938 1038 1138 1238
Berry Brow 0642 0741 0848 0941 1041 1141 1241
Lockwood 0644 0744 0851 0944 1044 1144 1244
Huddersfield 0650 0749 0856 0949 1049 1149 1249
Darton 0646 0736 0840 0940 1040 1140
Wakefield Kirkgate 0629 0658 0729 0747 0829 0852 0929 0952 1029 1052 1129 1152 1229
Normanton 0633 0702 0733 0752 0856 0956 1056 1156
Castleford 0710 0800 0904 1004 1104 1204
Woodlesford 0719 0809 0913 1013 1113 1213
Leeds 0650 0733 0750 0823 0851 0927 0950 1027 1050 1127 1150 1227 1250
Notes: G Through train from Retford k Arrives 7 minutes earlier n Arrives 1818

1 How long does the 0536 from Sheffield

take to get to Huddersfield?

2 How long does the 1008 from Sheffield

take to get to Leeds?

3 How long does the 0635 from

Wombwell take to get to Normanton?

4 What is the last station before 5 If you arrive at Sheffield station at 0730, how long
Huddersfield? will you have to wait for the next train to Leeds?

198
FM Ch 13 Timetable PB 8.3 30/4/08 17:22 Page 199

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

6 Only two trains a day from Sheffield in the morning do not go any further than
Barnsley. What times do these trains leave Sheffield?

7 a The first fast train to Leeds leaves Sheffield at 0550. How many stations,
except Sheffield and Leeds, does it stop at?
b How long does the this train take to get from Sheffield to Wakefield Kirkgate?
c How many stations does a slow train from Sheffield to Leeds stop at,
except at Sheffield and Leeds?

8 Ken lives in Penistone. He wants to catch the 0718 to Huddersfield. It takes

him 15 minutes to walk to the station. On the way he buys a paper which can
take up to 2 minutes. He likes to be at the station at least 5 minutes early.
What time should he leave home?

9 What is special about the 0751 fast train to Leeds from Sheffield?

10 If you arrive at Sheffield station at half past eight in the morning, how long
do you have to wait before you can catch a train to Elsecar?

11 Frank, who lives in Barnsley, has an interview in Leeds at 11 am. The

hotel where the interview is being held is 5 minutes walk from the station.
What is the time of the latest train that Frank can catch from Barnsley?

12 Mary, who lives in Wombwell, is meeting her friend for coffee in

Huddersfield at 10 am. The caf is 10 minutes from the station.
What time train should Mary catch to get to Huddersfield in time?

13 Ahmed lives in Elsecar and has to get to Huddersfield to catch a

train that leaves Huddersfield at 0757. Which train should he catch
from Elsecar?

14 What time does the 0851 from Sheffield arrive at Barnsley station?

15 How long does the 0736 from Sheffield take to get to Penistone?

199
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:09 Page 200

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

CHAPTER 14 Solving Problems

This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
How to investigate problems When to use symbols, words or
involving numbers and measures algebra to describe a problem
How to identify important When to use tables, diagrams
information in a question and graphs
How to interpret information How to break down a
from graphs calculation into simpler steps
How to use examples to prove How to solve simple problems
a statement is true or false using ratio and proportion
How to divide a quantity using
proportion or ratio
How to solve problems
involving ratios and proportions
How to compare two ratios

Number and measures

A newspaper has 48 pages. The pages
have stories, adverts or both on them. 50%
of the pages have both. Twice as many
pages have adverts only as have stories
only. How many pages have stories only?

Example 14.1 Use the digits 1, 2, 3 and 4 once only to make the largest possible product.
To make large numbers, the larger digits need to have the greatest value. So try a few
examples:
41 32 = 1312
42 31 = 1302
43 21 = 903
431 2 = 862
There are other possibilities, but these all give smaller answers.
So the biggest product is 41 32 = 1312.

200
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:09 Page 201

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Exercise 14A a
b
c
Three consecutive numbers add up to 171. What are the numbers?
Three consecutive numbers add up to 255. What are the numbers?
Three consecutive numbers add up to 375. What are the numbers?
6
d Show that it is likely that all three consecutive numbers add up to a multiple of 3.

a Find two consecutive odd numbers with a product of 143.

b Find two consecutive odd numbers with a product of 575.
c Find two consecutive odd numbers with a product of 783.
d Do you think the product of two consecutive odd numbers will always be odd?

a Find two consecutive even numbers with a product of 288.

b Find two consecutive even numbers with a product of 728.
c Find two consecutive even numbers with a product of 1224.
d Do you think the product of two consecutive even numbers will always be even?

a Copy and complete the table.

Power of 3 Answer Units digit

31 3 3
32 9 9
33 27 7
34 81 1
35 243
36
37
38

b What is the units digit of the answer to 344?

A dog and a cat run around a circular track of length

48 m. They both set off in the same direction from
the starting line at the same time. The dog runs at
6 m per second and the cat runs at 4 m per second.
How long is it before the dog and the cat are
together again?

Amy is 6 years older than Bill. Two years ago Amy was three times as old as Bill.
How old will Amy be in 4 years time?

A map has a scale of 1 cm to 2 12 km. The road between two towns is 5 cm on the
map, to the nearest centimetre.
a Calculate the shortest possible actual distance between the two towns.
b Calculate the difference between the shortest and longest possible distances
between the two towns.

201
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:09 Page 202

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

6 Which is the greater mass, 3 kg or 7 pounds (lb)? Explain your answer.

Which is the greater length, 10 miles or 15 kilometres? Explain your answer.

Which is the greater area, 1 square mile or 1 square kilometre? Explain your answer.

Write down a three-digit number using three different digits. Reverse the
digits and write down this new number. You should now have two different
three-digit numbers. Subtract the smaller number from the bigger number.
Your answer will have either two or three digits. If it has two digits (for
example 99), rewrite it with three (099).
Now reverse the digits of your answer and write down that number. Add this
number to your previous answer. Your final answer should be a four-digit number.
Either repeat using different numbers, or compare your answer with someone
elses. Write down what you notice.
What happens if you do not use different digits at the start?

Using algebra, graphs and diagrams to

solve problems
Of three chickens (A, B and C), A and B have a
total mass of 4.1 kg, A and C have a total mass of
5.8 kg, and B and C have a total mass of 6.5 kg.
What is the mass of each chicken?

Example 14.2 A gardener has a fixed charge of 5 and an hourly rate of 3 per hour. Write down
an equation for the total charge C when the gardener is hired for n hours. State the
cost of hiring the gardener for 6 hours.
The formula is:
C = 5 (for the fixed charge) plus 3 n (for the hours worked)
C = 5 + 3n
If n = 6 then C = 5 + (3 6) = 23
So the charge is 23.

Example 14.3 I think of a number, add 3 and then double it. The answer is 16. What is the
number?
? +3 2 16

Working this flowchart backwards:

5 3 2 16

The answer is 5.

202
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:09 Page 203

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Exercise 14B A man and his suitcase weigh 84.1 kg, to the nearest tenth of a kilogram. The
suitcase weighs 12 kg to the nearest kilogram. What is the heaviest that the man
could weigh?
6
The sum of two numbers is 325 and the difference is 17. What is the product of the
two numbers?

a A tool-hire company has a fixed charge of 12 plus 5 per day to hire a tool.
Write the total hire charge C as a formula in terms of the number of days n.
b Work out the cost for 10 days.
c A different company represents
25
its charges on the graph shown.
20

15
Cost ()
Use the graph to work out the fixed 10
charge and the daily rate.
5

0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Number of days

a Draw the next pattern in the

sequence.
b How many squares will the fifth
pattern have?
c Write down a rule to work out the number of squares in the next pattern.

I think of a number, double it and add 1. The answer is 33.

a Write down an equation to represent this information.
b What is the number?

I think of a number, square it and subtract 5. The answer is 31.

a Write down an equation to represent this information.
b What is the number?

I think of a number, double it and add 5. The answer is the same as the number plus 12.
a Write down an equation to represent this information.
b What is the number?

Each year a man invests 50 more than the year before. In the first year he invested
100.
a How much does he invest in the 10th year?
b Write down a formula for the amount he invests in the nth year.

A grid has 100 squares. If the squares are labelled 1p, 2p, 4p, 8p, 16p, , what is
the label on the 100th square? Write your answer as a power of 2.

There are 32 teams in a knockout tournament. In the first round there will be 16
matches. How many matches will there be altogether?

203
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:09 Page 204

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

6 Equilateral triangles are pieced together to make a pattern of triangles as shown. The
first diagram has only one small triangle.
1 How many small triangles are in the next two patterns?
2 Extend the patterns to see if you can work out a formula for the number of small
triangles in the nth pattern.
3 What is the special name given to this pattern?

Logic and proof

Look at the recipe, which is for four cake
Chocolate
people. How much of each ingredient 500 g flour
r
is needed to make a chocolate cake for 100 g suga wder
po
35 g cocoa
six people? 60 g butter

Example 14.4 Take any three consecutive numbers. Multiply the first by the third. Square the
second. Work out the difference between the two answers.
For example, take 7, 8, 9:
79 = 63
8 = 8 8 = 64
2

difference = 1
Whichever numbers you choose, you will always get an answer of 1.

Example 14.5 Prove that the sum of three odd integers is always odd. (Remember: An integer is a
positive whole number.)
Call any integer m.
Then 2m is an even integer, because any multiple of 2 is even.
Therefore 2m + 1 is an odd integer, because any even integer plus 1 is odd.
In just the same way, we can call any other two integers n and p, and make two odd
integers 2n + 1 and 2p + 1.
We now have three odd integers: 2m + 1, 2n + 1, 2p + 1. The proof requires us to
add (sum) them:
Sum = (2m + 1) + (2n + 1) + (2p + 1)
= 2m + 2n + 2p + 2 + 1 (rearrange)
= 2(m + n + p + 1) + 1 (take factor 2)
= even + 1 (multiple of 2 is even)
= odd (any even plus 1 is odd)
So we have proved that the sum of three odd integers is always odd.

204
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:09 Page 205

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Exercise 14C Copy and complete the following number problems. Each box represents one digit.
a 5 b 1 6 c 3
6
+ 7 5 1

5 4 9 7 9 5 1 6

2
d 1 = 232
2
e 4 = 1 1

f 1 2 = 3

Give an example to show that the sum of three odd numbers is always odd.

Prove that the sum of two consecutive numbers is always odd.

Show by example that the product of three consecutive numbers is divisible by 6.

Explain why the only even prime number is 2.

Show that the product of two consecutive numbers is always even.

a Find the three numbers below 30 that have exactly three factors.
b What do you notice about these numbers?

Find the numbers less than 30 that all

have exactly six factors.

What is special about all numbers with

exactly three factors?

Which bottle in the diagram is the best

value for money?

Which is the better value for money?

a 6 litres for 7.50 or 3 litres for 3.80
b 4.5 kg for 1.80 or 8 kg for 4.00
c 200 g for 1.60 or 300 g for 2.10
d Six chocolate bars for 1.50 or four chocolate bars for 90p

A recipe uses 750 g of meat and makes a meal for five people. How many grams of
meat would be needed if the meal was for eight people?

205
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:09 Page 206

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

6 1 Write down a prime number that is not 2 or 3. Now write down the
nearest multiple of 6 to your prime number. Work out the difference
between your prime number and the nearest multiple of 6. Choose
another prime number and repeat the process. What do you notice?
2 Can you prove that your result will work every time?

Proportion
Look at the picture.
Can you work out how many pints are in
3 litres?

Example 14.6 A caf sells 200 cups of tea,150 cups of coffee

and 250 other drinks in a day.
What proportion of the drinks sold are:
a cups of tea? b cups of coffee?
a There are 200 cups of tea out of 600 cups altogether, so the proportion of cups
of tea is 200
= 1
600
.
3

b There are 150 cups of coffee out of 600 cups altogether, so the proportion of
cups of coffee is 150
= 1
600
.
4

6 Exercise 14D An orange drink is made using one part juice to four parts water. What proportion of
the drink is juice? Give your answer as a fraction, decimal or percentage.

A woman spends 75 on food and 25 on clothing. What proportion of her spending

is on food?

A supermarket uses 43 of its space for food and the rest for non-food items. What is
the ratio of food to non-food items?

A green paint is made by mixing blue and yellow paint in the ratio 3 : 7. How many
litres of blue and yellow paint are needed to make:
a 20 litres of green paint? b 5 litres of green paint?

A caf generally sells tea and coffee in the ratio of 3 : 5.

a How many of each drink will have been sold if 136 drinks were sold altogether?
b One day 39 cups of tea were sold, how many drinks were sold that day
altogether?
c One weekend 115 cups of coffee were sold, how many cups of tea were sold?

206
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:09 Page 207

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

A supermarket tries to divide its stores between food and other goods in the ratio
of 7 : 3.
a One store has 540 m2 floor space. How much is allocated to each?
6
b Another store has 123 m2 allocated to non-food goods. How much is allocated
to food?

Grannies recipe for Lemon Punch is to use lemon juice and cola in the ratio of 3 : 17.
a Grannie wanted to make 5 litres of punch. How much of each ingredient does
she need?
b One evening, Grannie found that she only had 300 ml of lemon juice. What is
the most Lemon Punch she could make with that?
c Joy, Grannies granddaughter, brought round four 2-litre bottles of cola. What is
the most punch Grannie could make with that?

In 30 minutes, 40 litres of water run through a pipe. How much water will run
through the pipe in 12 minutes?

A recipe for fish pie for four people uses: 550 g of cod; 150 ml of milk; 1 kg of
potatoes; 200 g of cheese.
a Jonathan makes a fish pie for 10 people. How many millilitres of milk does he
use?
b Edna uses 350 g of cheese. How many people could she make fish pie for?

Design a spreadsheet that a shopkeeper could use to increase the price of

items by 20%.

Ratio
John and Mary are sharing out some sweets.
John wants twice as many sweets as Mary, and
there are 21 sweets altogether. Can you work
out how many sweets they each get?

Example 14.7 Alice and Michael have 128 CDs altogether. Alice has three times as many as
Michael. How many CDs do they each have?
If Alice has three times as many as Michael, then the ratio is 3 : 1. This means that
altogether there are four (3 + 1) parts to share out.
Four parts is all 128 CDs, so one part is 128 4 = 32 CDs.
So Michael has 32 CDs and Alice has 32 3 = 96 CDs.
You can check your answer: 32 + 96 = 128.

207
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 208

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 14.8 James and Briony are two goalkeepers. James has let in twice as many goals as
Briony. Altogether they have let in 27 goals. How many goals has James let in?
James has let in twice as many goals as Briony. So if Briony has let in x goals, then
James has let in 2x goals.
Altogether, this means that 3x = 27. So x = 9 and 2x = 18.
So James has let in 18 goals.

Example 14.9 The ratio of shots taken to goals scored by two football teams are:
Team A 7 : 2
Team B 11 : 3
a Change each ratio into the form n : 1.
b State which team is more accurate.
a Team A 7 : 2 = 3.5 : 1
Team B 11 : 3 = 3.67 : 1
b Team A is more accurate as they take fewer shots for each goal scored.

6 Exercise 14E Harriet and Richard go shopping and buy 66 items altogether. Harriet buys twice as
many items as Richard. How many items does Harriet buy?

At a concert the numbers of males to females are in the ratio 3 : 2. There are 350
people altogether. How many females are at the concert?

180 people see a film at the cinema. The numbers of children to adults are in the
ratio 5 : 4. How many children see the film?

In a fishing contest the number of trout

caught to the number of carp caught is in
the ratio 1 : 2. The total number of trout and
carp is 72. How many carp were caught?

A bakery makes 1400 loaves. The ratio of white to brown is 4 : 3. How many brown
loaves did the bakery make?

A do-it-yourself shop sells paints. The ratio of gloss paint to emulsion paint sold on
one day is 2 : 3. If they sell 85 litres of paint, how much gloss paint do they sell?

7 The table shows some information about pupils in a school. There are 1224 pupils in
the school.

Left-handed Right-handed
Girls 96 540
Boys 84 504

208
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 209

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

a What percentage of the pupils are girls?

b What is the ratio of left-handed pupils to right-handed pupils?
Write your ratio in the form of 1 : n.
7
c One pupils was chosen at random from the whole school.
What was the probability that the pupil chosen is a right-handed boy?

Alison and Murray have a collection of 132 books, but Alison put into the collection
twice as many as Murray. How many books did each put into the collection?

Some cricketers are more likely to take wickets than others. Consider the following
statistics, showing some players ratio of wickets to overs taken.
Sidebottam 4 : 11
Trueman 2:3
Old 3 : 13

a Change each ratio into 1 : n.

b State which cricketer took more wickets per over.

A cake mixture uses currants and raisins in the ratio 3 : 2. A different cake mixture
uses currants and raisins in the ratio 5 : 4.
a Change each ratio into the form n : 1.
b Which cake mixture has the greater proportion of currants to raisins?

Purple paint is made using two parts of blue paint to three parts of red paint. A girl
has 100 ml of each colour. What is the maximum amount of purple paint that she
can make?

Draw a cube of side 1 cm and write down the volume. Double the length of
the sides and write down the volume of the new cube. Work out the ratio of
the new volume to the previous volume. Double the side length several more
times, working out the new : previous volume ratio each time.
Repeat this exercise, but triple or quadruple the side length each time instead.
Can you find a connection between the new : previous volume ratio and the
new : previous side ratio?

6 I am able to interpret information presented in a variety of forms.

I can justify answers by testing for particular cases.
I can calculate using ratios in appropriate situations.

7 I can solve problems using proportional change.

I can justify my solutions to problems.

209
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 210

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

1 2005 Paper 1

6 a Look at this information:

Two numbers multiply to make zero.

One of the statements below is true.

Write it down.
Both numbers must be zero.
At least one number must be zero.
Exactly one number must be zero.
Neither number can be zero.

b Now look at this information:

Two numbers add to make zero.

If one number is zero, what is the other number?

If neither number is zero, give an example of what the numbers could be.

2 2006 Paper 1

a Give an example to show the statement below is not correct:

When you multiply a number by 2, the answer is always greater than 2.

b Now give an example to show the statement below is not correct:

When you subtract a number from 2, the answer is always less than 2.

3 2005 Paper 2
In one week Jamal watched television for 26 hours.
In that week:

He watched television for the same length of time on

Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday and Thursday.
On each of Friday, Saturday and Sunday, he watched
television for twice as long as on Monday.

How long did he spend watching television on Saturday?

Write your answer in hours and minutes.

210
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 211

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

National Test style question

4 To take the whole of a school on a trip requires a lot of transport.

a A school of 1800, including pupils and staff, created a table showing bus capacity and how many buses
would be needed.
7
Complete the table.
Bus capacity 24 30 40 50 60
Number of buses 45 30 25 24

b Write an equation using symbols to connect P, the number of people in the school, B, the capacity of a
bus, and N, the number of buses.

c One bus company estimated that on a school trip they will travel at an average speed of 36 miles per
hour. The headmaster is thinking about a trip that would be 45 miles away.
How long, in hours and minutes, is the estimate for the time of this journey. Show your working.

d Another school had a quote for their trip needing 60 buses. If they were to have used buses with an
increased capacity of 100%, how many buses would have been needed?

e How many buses would have been needed if the capacity of buses had been increased by 50%?

f The petrol tank on a small bus, measures x by y by z and it takes 1 minute 30 seconds to fill.
How long will it take to fill a large bus petrol tank measuring 2x by 2y by 2z at the same rate?

211
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 212

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

CHAPTER 15 Geometry and Measures 4

This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
How to draw plans, elevations How to draw nets of 3-D shapes
and scale drawings How to plot coordinates in all
How to solve problems using four quadrants
coordinates How to measure and draw
How to use map scales angles
How to find a locus How to calculate the surface
How to use bearings area and volume of cuboids
How to solve problems with
cuboids

Plans and elevations

A plan is the view of a 3-D shape when it is looked at from above. An elevation is the
view of a 3-D shape when it is looked at from the front or from the side.

Example 15.1 The 3-D shape shown is drawn on centimetre A

isometric dotted paper. Notice that the paper
must be used the correct way round, so always
check that the dots form vertical columns.

C
B

The plan, front elevation and side elevation can be drawn on centimetre-squared
paper:

Plan Front Side

from A elevation elevation
from B from C

212
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 213

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Exercise 15A Draw each of the following cuboids accurately on an isometric grid.
a
2 cm
b
4 cm
c
6
5 cm

3 cm 3 cm
2 cm

2 cm 1 cm
2 cm

Draw each of the following 3-D shapes accurately on an isometric grid.

a b 2 cm c 2 cm
1 cm 2 cm
2 cm
1 cm 1 cm
6 cm 2 cm
2 cm 2 cm
2 cm
3 cm 2 cm 6 cm
4 cm

Copy each of the following 3-D shapes onto an isometric grid.

a b

d
c

For each one, draw on centimetre-squared paper:

i the plan. ii the front elevation. iii the side elevation.

The plan, front elevation and side elevation of a 3-D solid are made up of cubes as
shown. Draw the solid on an isometric grid.

Plan Front Side

elevation elevation

213
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 214

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

6 a
The diagrams below are the views of various 3-D shapes from directly above.
b c d e f

For each one, write down the name of a 3-D shape that could have this plan.

Make a 3-D solid from multi-link cubes. On centimetre-squared paper draw its plan,
front elevation and side elevation. Show these to a partner, and ask them to construct
the solid using multi-link cubes. Compare the two solids made.

1 The letter T is drawn on an isometric grid, as shown on the left.

a Draw other capital letters that can be drawn on an isometric grid.
b Explain why only certain capital letters can be drawn easily on the
grid.
c Design a poster, using any of these letters, to make a logo for a
person who has these letters as their initials.
2 The diagram on the right is another way of representing a cube in 2-D.
This representation is known as a Schlegel diagram,
named after a famous German mathematician.
Investigate Schlegel diagrams, using reference books
or the Internet.

Scale drawings
A scale drawing is a smaller drawing of an actual object. A scale must always be clearly
given by the side of the scale drawing.

Kitchen Bathroom
Bedroom 2

wardrobe Scale: 1 cm to 3 m

Living/Dining Room
Bedroom 1

214
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 215

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 15.2 Shown is a scale drawing of Rebeccas room.

On the scale drawing, the length of the room is Window
5 cm, so the actual length of the room is 5 m.
On the scale drawing, the width of the room is
3.5 cm, so the actual width of the room is 3.5 m.
On the scale drawing, the width of the window is
2 cm, so the actual width of the window is 2 m.
Door
Scale: 1 cm to 1 m

Exercise 15B The lines shown are drawn using a scale of 1 cm to 10 m. Write down the length
each line represents.

a
b
c
d
e

The diagram shows a scale drawing for a

school hall.
a Find the actual length of the hall.
b Find the actual width of the hall.
c Find the actual distance between the opposite
corners of the hall.
Scale: 1 cm to 5 m

The diagram shown is Ryans scale drawing for his

mathematics classroom. Nathan notices that Ryan
has not put a scale on the drawing, but he knows
that the length of the classroom is 8 m.
a What scale has Ryan used?
b What is the actual width of the classroom?
c What is the actual area of the classroom?

Copy and complete the table below for a scale drawing in which the scale is 4 cm
to 1 m.
Actual length Length on scale drawing
a 4m
b 1.5 m
c 50 cm
d 12 cm
e 10 cm
f 4.8 cm

215
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 216

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

The plan shown is for a

bungalow.
Bedroom 1 Bedroom 2
a Find the actual
dimensions of each of
the following rooms.
Bathroom
i The kitchen
ii The bathroom Living room
iii Bedroom 1 Hall
Kitchen
iv Bedroom 2
b Calculate the actual
area of the living
room. Scale: 1 cm to 2 m

The diagram shows the plan

of a football pitch. It is not
drawn accurately. Use the
measurements on the diagram
to make a scale drawing of the 80 yd 24 yd 10 yd
pitch (choose your own scale).
18 yd

120 yd

1 On centimetre-squared paper, design a layout for a bedroom. Make cut-outs

for any furniture you wish to have in the room. Use a scale of 2 cm to 1 m.
2 You will need a metre rule or a tape measure for this activity. Draw a
plan of your classroom, including the desks and any other furniture in
the room. Choose your own scale.

Finding the mid-point of a line segment

The next example will remind you how to plot points in all four quadrants using
x and y coordinates.
It will also show you how to find the mid-point of a line segment that joins two points.

Example 15.3 The coordinates of the points A, B, C and D on the y

5
grid are A(4, 4), B( 2, 4), C(2, 1) and D(2, 3).
4
The mid-point of the line segment that joins A and B B X A
3
is X (X is usually referred to as the mid-point of AB). 2
From the diagram, the coordinates of X are (1, 4). 1
C
Notice that the y coordinate is the same for the three 5 4 3 2 1 O 1 2 3 4 5
x
points on the line. 1
Y
The mid-point of CD is Y. From the diagram, the 2
3
coordinates of Y are (2, 1). Notice that the x D
4
coordinate is the same for the three points on the line.
5

216
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 217

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Exercise 15C Copy the grid on the right and plot the points y
5
A, B, C, D, E and F.
B 4 A
a Write down the coordinates of the points A, 3
C
B, C, D, E and F. 2
b Using the grid to help, write down the 1
coordinates of the mid-point of each of the x
following line segments. 5 4 3 2 1 O 1 2 3 4 5
1
D
i AB 2
ii CD 3
iii BE 4
E F
iv EF 5

Copy the grid on the right and plot the points y

P, Q, R and S. 5
4
a Write down the coordinates of the points
3
P, Q, R and S. S P
2
b Join the points to form the rectangle PQRS.
1
Using the grid to help, write down the
coordinates of the mid-point of each of the x
5 4 3 2 1 O 1 2 3 4 5
following lines. 1

i PQ ii QR 2

iii PS iv SR 3
R Q
4
c Write down the coordinates of the mid-point
of the diagonal PR. 5

a Copy and complete the table, using the points on the grid shown. The first row of
the table has been completed for you.

Coordinates of Coordinates of Coordinates of y

10
the first point on the second point on the mid-point of
9
the line segment the line segment the line segment
8
B A
AB A(8, 8) B(2, 8) (5, 8) 7
6
AD F
5
BC 4 D
3
BF
2
C
AF 1
E
x
O
CE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

b Can you spot a connection between the coordinates of the first and second points
and the coordinates of the mid-point? Write down a rule in your own words.

By using the rule you found in Question 3 or by plotting the points on a coordinate
grid, find the mid-points of the line that joins each of the following pairs of
coordinate points.
a A(3, 2) and B(3, 6) b C(4, 6) and D(6, 10) c E(3, 2) and F(5, 4)
d G(8, 6) and H(2, 3) e I(5, 6) and J(3 , 2)

217
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 218

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

6 The aim is to find a formula for the mid-point of a line segment AB.

x
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

On the x-axis above, what number lies halfway between 4 and 8? Can you
see a way of getting the answer without using the number line? The answer is
4 + 8 = 6.
the mean of 4 and 8 or
2
Test this rule by trying other numbers.
x1 and x2 lie on the x-axis, as shown below. What number lies halfway
x1 + x2
between x1 and x2? The answer is the mean of x1 and x2, which is .
2
x
0 x1 x2
y
The same rule will work for numbers on the y-axis.
On the y-axis shown, what number lies halfway
y2
between y1 and y2? The answer is the mean of y1
y1 + y2
and y2, which is .
2 y1

0
This rule can now be applied to find the coordinates y
of the mid-point of the line AB on the diagram shown. y2 B
Point A has coordinates (x1, y1) and point B has
coordinates (x2, y2). Using the above rule for both axes,
we find that the coordinates of the mid-point of AB are y1 A
given by the formula:
x
O x1 x2
(x1 + x2 y1 + y2
,
2 2 )
y
Points A, B, C, D and E are plotted on
the grid shown. Use the formula above 5
to find the mid-point for each of the 4
C A
following line segments. 3
a AB
2
b BC B
1
c CD
x
d DE 5 4 3 2 1 O 1 2 3 4 5
e AE 1
2
D
3
4 E
5

218
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 219

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Map scales
Maps are scale drawings used to represent areas of land in subjects such as geography.
Distance on a map can be shown in two different ways, as in the examples below.
The first way is to give a map scale. This gives a distance on the map and an equivalent
distance on the ground. This is shown in Example 15.4.
The second way is to give a map ratio. A map ratio has no units and will look something
like 1 : 10 000. Example 15.5 explains how to use a map ratio.
A direct distance is as the crow flies. String can be used to estimate map distance along
paths and roads.

Example 15.4 The map shows part of

south-east England.
Find the actual direct
distance between Ramsgate
Maidstone and Dover.
The direct distance
Maidstone Canterbury
between Maidstone
and Dover on the map
is 5.5 cm. The scale is
1 cm to 10 km. Dover
So 5.5 cm represents Folkestone
5.5 10 km = 55 km. er
D ov
The actual distance of
aits
between Maidstone Str
and Dover is 55 km.
Hastings
Scale: 1 cm to 10 km

Example 15.5 The scale of the map in Example 15.4 is 1 cm to 10 km.

There are 100 cm in a metre, and 1000 metres in a kilometre.
So 10 km = 10 100 1000 = 1 000 000 cm.
Therefore 1 cm to 10 km can also be written as 1 cm to 1 000 000 cm.
So the map ratio will be given as 1 : 1 000 000.
When the ratio is used to find actual distances, each centimetre on the map will
represent 1 000 000 cm or 10 km on the ground. Similarly, each inch on the map
will represent 1 000 000 inches or 15.78 miles on the ground.

219
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 220

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Exercise 15D Write each of the following map scales as a map ratio.
a 1 cm to 1 m b 1 cm to 4 m c 4 cm to 1 m
d 1 cm to 1 km e 2 cm to 1 km

Using the map in Example 15.4, find the actual direct distance between:
a Maidstone and Hastings b Canterbury and Ramsgate
c Folkestone and Dover

6 The map ratio on a map is 1 : 50 000. The direct distance between two towns on the
map is 4 cm. What is the actual direct distance between the two towns?

The map ratio on a map is 1 : 100 000. Peter has just been for a walk. Using a piece
of string, he measures the map distance of his walk and finds it to be 12.5 cm. How
far did he walk?

The map ratio on a map of Europe is 1 : 20 000 000. The actual direct distance
between Paris and Rome is 1100 kilometres. What is the direct distance on the map?

The map shows York city centre. Find the actual direct distance between each of the
following.
a The station and the football ground
b The National Railway Museum and the Castle Museum
c York Minster and the Barbican Centre
d The station and the law courts

Football
ground

e
O us
R.
YORK

York
Minster

National
Railway Law
Museum courts

Station
Castle
R.

Museum
O
use

Barbican
Centre

Scale: 1 cm to 250 m

220
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 221

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

The map shows the path taken by a group of fell walkers in the Lake District. They
start at the car park in Glenridding and walk on the path to Helvellyn.
Use a piece of string to find the actual distance of the walk between Glenridding and
6
Helvellyn.

Glenridding

Lantys
Tarn

Red Tarn Mountain

rescue kit
Helvellyn

Striding Edge Scale: 1 : 25 000

1 Write each of the following imperial map scales as a map ratio.

a 1 inch to 1 mile b 1 inch to 1 yard
1
c 3 inches to 2 mile
d 1 inch to 50 yards
2 Ask your teacher for a map of Great Britain. Using the scale given on the
map, find the direct distances between various towns and cities.
3 Use the Internet to look for maps of the area where you live and find the
scale that is used. Print out copies of the maps and find the distances
between local landmarks.

Loci
The trail from the jet aircraft has traced out a path. The path of the jet is known as a locus
(the plural is loci). A locus is a set of points that satisfies a given set of conditions or a rule.
It is useful to think of a locus as a path traced out by a single moving point.

221
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 222

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 15.6 Mr Yeates is walking along a straight track that is

equidistant from two trees (equidistant means the
same distance). The sketch shows his locus. The
locus can be described as the perpendicular
bisector of the imaginary line joining the two trees.
In some cases, the locus can be drawn accurately
if measurements are given.
Tree
Locus

Tree

Example 15.7 Mr McGintys goat is tethered to a post by a

rope 2 m long. The sketch shows the locus of
the goat as it moves around the post with the
rope remaining taut. The locus can be
described as a circle with centre at the post
and radius 2 m.

Post
2m

Locus

7 Exercise 15E Draw a sketch and describe the locus for each of the following situations.
a A cricket ball being hit for a six by a batsman
b The Earth as it orbits the Sun
c A bullet from a rifle
d The tip of Big Bens minute hand as it moves from 3 oclock to half past three
e A parachutist after jumping from a plane
f The pendulum of a grandfather clock

Barn A and barn B are 500 m apart. A farmer drives his tractor between the barns so
that he is equidistant from each one. On a sketch of the diagram, draw the locus of
the farmer.

barn A barn B
500 m

222
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 223

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

The two fences on the diagram border a park.

Kathryn enters the park at an entrance at X. She
then walks through the park so that she is
7
equidistant from each fence.
a On a sketch of the diagram, draw
Kathryns locus.
b Describe the locus. X

A toy car is moving so that it is always a fixed distance from a point X at the edge of
the room, as shown on the diagram.

a On a sketch of the diagram, draw the locus of the car.

b Describe the locus.

The line AB is 20 cm long and C is its mid-point.

A C B

a Describe the locus of A if the line is rotated about C.

b Describe the locus of A if the line is rotated about B.

The line AB is 6 cm long.

A B
Draw the line AB. Then draw an accurate diagram to show all the points that are
3 cm or less from AB.

The diagram is a plan of a yard with part of a building in it. The building is shown in
grey. A guard dog is tethered to the base of the wall of the building, at the point
marked . The guard dogs chain is 3 m long.
Draw a scale diagram to WARNING
show the area of the yard GUARD DOGS
where the dog can patrol.
Use a scale of 1 cm to 1 m.

1m 1m 7 m

3m

5m

223
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 224

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

7 1 The diagram on the right shows the dimensions of a

building. A path is to be laid around the building so
that the edge of the path is always 1 m away from
2m
8m

the building. Make a scale drawing to show the 6m

edge of the path around the building. Use a scale
of 1 cm to 1 m.
5m
2 The diagram shows the position of two ticket meters in a large car
park in a city centre. When Mrs Kitson buys her parking ticket, she
always walks to the nearer meter. On a sketch of the car park, using
a ruler and compasses, divide the car park into two areas in which
parking is nearer to one or other of the two meters.

3 Use reference material or the Internet to find out about contours,

isotherms and isobars. How are these related to a locus?
4 If you have access to ICT facilities, find out how to generate shapes and
paths, using programs such as Logo. For example, find out how to draw
regular polygons, star shapes and spiral shapes.

Bearings
There are four main directions on a compass north (N), south (S),
east (E) and west (W). These directions are examples of compass N
bearings. A bearing is a specified direction in relation to due north. NW NE

The symbol for due north is: W E

N
SW SE
S

You have probably seen this symbol on maps in geography.

Bearings are mainly used for navigation purposes at sea, in the air and in sports such as
orienteering. A bearing is measured in degrees (). The angle is always measured
clockwise from the north line. A bearing is always given using three digits and is referred
to as a three-figure bearing. For example, the bearing for the direction east is 090.

224
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 225

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 15.8 On the diagram, the three-figure bearing of B from A is N

035 and the three-figure bearing of A from B is 215.
Remember: Imagine yourself at one point. Face north.
Then turn clockwise through the bearing angle until you
face the other point. B 215
N

35
A

Example 15.9 The diagram shows the positions of Manchester and N

Leeds on a map.
The bearing of Leeds from Manchester is 050.
To find the bearing of Manchester from Leeds, use the N
dotted line to find the alternate angle of 50 and then Leeds
add 180. The bearing is 230.
50 50 180
Notice that the two bearings have a difference of 180.
Such bearings are often referred to as back bearings.
Manchester

Exercise 15F Write down each of the following compass bearings as three-figure bearings.
a South b West c North-east d South-west

Write down the three-figure bearing of B from A for each of the following.
a b c d
N N B N N

B B
64 97
8 A
A A A B 300

Find the three-figure bearing of X from Y for each of the following.

a b c d
X
X
N X N N
N

39
45 Y
Y Y X 78 Y
160

225
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 226

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Draw a rough sketch to show each of the following bearings (mark the angle on each
sketch).
a From a ship A, the bearing of a light-house B is 030
b From a town C, the bearing of town D is 138
c From a gate E, the bearing of a trigonometric point F is 220
d From a control tower G, the bearing of an aircraft H is 333

6 The two diagrams show the positions of towns and cities in England.

N
N
N

N Nottingham 106
Scarborough
42 Blackpool
Birmingham

Find the bearing of each of the following.

a Nottingham from Birmingham b Birmingham from Nottingham
c Scarborough from Blackpool d Blackpool from Scarborough

Terri and Josh are planning a walk on Ilkley Moor in Yorkshire. The scale drawing
below shows the route they will take, starting from Black Pots.
N

N White Wells

Black Pots
N

Scale: 2 cm to 1 km
Twelve Apostles

a What is the total distance of their walk if they keep to a direct route between the
landmarks?
b They have to take three-figure bearings between each landmark because of poor
visibility. Use a protractor to find the bearings of the following.
i White Wells from Black Pots ii Twelve Apostles from White Wells
iii Black Pots from Twelve Apostles

226
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 227

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

1 A liner travels from a port X on a bearing of 140 for 120 nautical miles
to a port Y. It then travels from port Y on a bearing of 250 for a further
160 nautical miles to a port Z.
6
a Make a scale drawing to show the journey of the liner. Use a scale of
1 cm to 20 nautical miles.
b Use your scale drawing to find:
i the direct distance the liner travels from port Z to return to port X.
ii the bearing of port X from port Z
2 The diagram shows the approximate Stansted N
direct distances between three
international airports. The bearing of 65 km
Stansted airport from Heathrow
80 km
airport is 040. Heathrow
40 km
Gatwick

a Use this information to make a scale drawing to show the positions

of the airports. Use a scale of 1 cm to 10 km.
b Use your scale drawing to find:
i the bearing of Gatwick airport from Heathrow airport.
ii the bearing of Gatwick airport from Stansted airport.

A cube investigation
For this investigation you will need a collection of cubes
and centimetre isometric dotted paper.
Two cubes can only be arranged in one way to make a solid
shape, as shown.
Copy the diagram onto centimetre isometric dotted paper. The
surface area of the solid is 10 cm2.

Three cubes can be arranged in two different ways, as shown.

or

227
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 228

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Copy the diagrams onto centimetre isometric dotted paper. The surface area
of both solids is 14 cm2.
Here is an arrangement of four cubes.
The surface area of the solid is 18 cm2.

6 Exercise 15G How many different arrangements can you make using four cubes? Draw all the
different arrangements on centimetre isometric dotted paper.

Make a table to show the surface areas of the different solids that you have made
using four cubes. What are the least and greatest surface areas for the different
solids?
Write down anything else you notice, for example, about the touching faces of
the cubes.
Look at the surface areas of the solids made from two, three and four cubes.
What do you think are the least and greatest surface areas of a solid made from
five cubes?

5 I can use scales and make scale drawings.

I can find coordinates of the mid-point of a line segment.
I can convert a map scale to a map ratio.
I can give three-figure bearings.

6 I can draw plans and elevations.

I can use map scales.
I can use three-figure bearings when solving problems.
I can find the surface area of a cuboid.

7 I can find the locus of a moving point.

228
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 229

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

1 1999 Paper 2
The diagram shows a model made with nine cubes. Five of the
cubes are grey. The other four cubes are white.
6
Side-view B
Side-view C

Side-view A
Side-view D

a The drawings below show the four side-views of the model. Which side-view does each drawing show?
i ii iii iv

b Copy and complete the top-view of the model by shading the squares that
are grey.

Top-view

c Imagine you turn the model upside down. What will the new top-view
of the model look like? Copy and complete the new top-view of the
model by shading the squares that are grey.

New top-view

229
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 230

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

2 2006 Paper 2

6 Each shape below is made from five cubes that are joined together.
Copy and complete the missing diagrams below.

View from above of the shape

Shape drawn on an isometric grid
drawn on a square grid

230
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 231

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

3 2000 Paper 1
The plan shows the position of
three towns, each marked with
Ashby 7
an X.
The scale of the plan is 1 cm
to 10 km.

The towns need a new radio

mast. The new radio mast Beaton
must be:
nearer to Ashby than Ceewater
less than 45 km from Beaton.
Copy or trace the plan. Show on
the copy the region where the
new radio mast can be placed. Ceewater
Leave in your construction lines.

4 2001 Paper 2
A gardener wants to plant a tree.
She wants it to be more than 8 m away from the vegetable plot.
She wants it to be more than 18 m away from the greenhouse.
The plan below shows part of the garden. The scale is 1 cm to 4 m.
Copy or trace the plan. Show accurately on the copy the region of the garden where she can plant the tree.
Label this region R.

Vegetable plot

Greenhouse

231
FM Ch 15 Photograph PB 8.3 7/5/08 11:54 Page 232

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Functional Maths

Photographs

FastPrint advertises the cost of photograph

prints in their shop.

Print size Price each

3" 2" (4) 0.99
Quantity Price
199 0.10 each
13 cm 9 cm 100249 0.09 each
250+ 0.08 each
Quantity Price
149 0.15 each
5099 0.12 each
100249 0.09 each
6" 4"
250499 0.08 each
500750 0.06 each
751+ 0.05 each
7 5 0.29
8 6 0.45
10" 8" 1.20
12" 8" 1.20
45 cm 30 cm 6.99

A school decides to use FastPrint to buy The print sizes are given in both imperial units
1 prints of a year group photograph. Pupils can 2 (" means inches) and metric units.
choose the size of the prints they want. They
a Use the conversion factor 1 cm = 0.394
can also choose to buy more than one size.
inches to change the 13 cm 9 cm and the
The schools order is as follows: 45 cm 30 cm print sizes into imperial sizes.
128 13 cm 9 cm prints Give your answers to one decimal place.
87 6" 4" prints b Which pairs of prints are twice the size
75 10" 8" prints in area?
and 60 12" 8" prints
What is the total cost of buying these prints?

232
FM Ch 15 Photograph PB 8.3 7/5/08 11:55 Page 233

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Here are the sizes of three picture frames A, B EasyPrint also advertises the cost
3 and C. 5 of photograph prints in their shop.
8" 8" 12"
3" 2" print 0.25 each
5" B 6" 4" print 0.12 each
6" A
9" C 7" 5" print 0.20 each
8" 6" print 0.42 each
10" 8" print 1.20 each
a The 7" 5" print will fit inside frame A.
12" 8" print 1.32 each
What will be the area of the outside border?
b Which of the prints will best fit inside the a If you order one of each print
other two frames if a suitable border is to size from EasyPrint, which
be left around the print? prints are cheaper than
FastPrint?
b If you wanted to order 120
4" 6" prints, which shop
would you choose? How much
would you save?
c What is the percentage increase
in the price if you ordered
8" 12" prints from EasyPrint
rather than from FastPrint?

Some of the prints are actual mathematical Any rectangle whose length and
4 enlargements of each other. 6 width are in the ratio 1.618 : 1 is
known as a Golden Rectangle.
12" 8"
10" 8" The Golden Rectangle is said to
be one of the most visually
pleasing rectangular shapes.
Many artists and architects have
used the shape within their work.
a Work out the ratio of the length
to the width in the form n : 1
for each print size at EasyPrint.
6" 4"
8" 6" 7" 5" b Which of the prints are close to
being golden rectangles?
Write down the sizes of the prints that are
exact enlargements of each other and state
the scale factor of the enlargement.

233
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 234

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

CHAPTER 16 Statistics 3
This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
How to plan tasks and collect data How to construct frequency tables
How to calculate a mean using an for discrete data
assumed mean How to find the mode, median,
How to construct frequency range and modal class for grouped
diagrams for continuous data data
How to construct simple line How to calculate the mean from a
graphs for time series simple frequency table
How to compare two distributions How to construct graphs and
by using an average and the range diagrams to represent data
How to compare theoretical How to write a short report from a
probabilities with experimental statistical survey
probabilities

Collecting data for frequency tables

When collecting data you will need to ask yourself
questions such as the following:
Does my data collection sheet record all the
relevant facts?
Is it detailed (accurate) enough?
Is my experiment reliable? Does it need repeating CM
several times?
Have I tested my questions on a small sample first?

Example 16.1 The journey times, in minutes, for a group of 16 railway travellers are shown below:
25, 47, 12, 32, 28, 17, 20, 43, 15, 34, 45, 22, 19, 36, 44, 17
Construct a frequency table to represent the data.
The data should be collected into a small number of equal classes. The range of
journey times is 47 12 = 35 minutes. So a suitable class size is 10 minutes.
The class intervals are written in the form 10 < T 20. This means 10 minutes to
20 minutes, including 20 minutes but excluding 10 minutes.
There are six times in the group 10 < T 20: 12, 17, 20, 15, 19 and 17.
There are three times in the group 20 < T 30: 25, 28, and 22.
There are three times in the group 30 < T 40: 32, 34 and 36.
There are four times in the group 40 < T 50: 47, 43, 45 and 44.

234
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 235

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Putting all this information into a table gives:

Time T (minutes) Frequency

10 < T 20 6
20 < T 30 3
30 < T 40 3
40 < T 50 4

Example 16.2 Look at the different methods of collecting data shown, and then decide which is
the most suitable method for each of the two tasks a and b. Briefly outline a plan for
each task.

Methods of collecting data

Construct a questionnaire
Do research on the Internet
Carry out an experiment
Use a software database (e.g. an encyclopaedia CD)
Visit a library for books and other print sources

a Compare the reaction times of two groups of pupils.

b Compare the age distribution of the populations of different countries.

a This task would require an experiment.

The plan would consider:
the detailed design of the reaction time experiment.

what results to expect (a hypothesis).

the number of pupils in each group.

how the pupils would be selected to ensure that there was no bias.

how to record the data.

how to analyse the results and report the findings.

b This task would use data obtained from the Internet, a software database or a
library.
The plan would consider:
which countries and what data to look at.

what results to expect (a hypothesis).

the most efficient way of obtaining the data.

how many years of data to compare.

how to record the data.

how to analyse the results and report the findings.

235
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 236

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

6 Exercise 16A The heights (in metres) of 20 people are

as follows:
Height h (metres)
1.40 < h 1.50
Frequency

1.65, 1.53, 1.71, 1.62, 1.48, 1.74, 1.56, 1.55, 1.50 < h 1.60
1.80, 1.85, 1.58, 1.61, 1.82, 1.67, 1.47, 1.76,
1.79, 1.66, 1.68, 1.73 1.60 < h 1.70
Copy and complete the frequency table. 1.70 < h 1.80
1.80 < h 1.90

The masses (in kilograms) of fish caught Mass M (kilograms) Frequency

one day by a fisherman are as follows: 0<M1
0.3, 5.6, 3.2, 0.4, 0.6, 1.1, 2.4, 4.8, 0.5,
1<M2
1.6, 5.1, 4.3, 3.7, 3.5
Copy and complete the frequency table.

7 Look at the different methods of collecting data in Example 16.2. Decide which is
the most suitable method for each of the following tasks. Briefly outline a plan for
each task including the points mentioned in Example 16.2.
a Comparing how easy two newspapers are to read
b Testing someones memory in a game
c Finding out peoples opinions on smoking

Criticise each of the following methods of collecting data.

a Recording long jump data for a whole school in one set of data
b Collecting data about the age of the population of a country and putting it into
groups of five years, i.e. 05, 610 etc.
c Giving a questionnaire about fitness to a small sample of members of a sports
club
d Testing boys reaction times in the morning and girls reaction times in the
afternoon using a different test

Write out a plan for collecting, analysing and reporting on data about the different types
of housing or shops around your school. In your plan, make sure that you consider the
scope of the task, a hypothesis, how to collect the data, how to record the data, and how
to analyse the results and present a report. Remember to state any difficulties that you
may have.

236
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 237

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Assumed mean and working with

statistics
The fathers age is double the combined age of
his children. Two years ago the children had an
average age of 7 years. The difference in the
childrens ages is 2 years. How old is the father?

Example 16.3 Find the mean of the four numbers 26.8, 27.2, 34.1, 36.4. Use 30 as the assumed mean.
Subtracting 30 from each number gives: 3.2, 2.8, 4.1, 6.4
Adding these numbers up gives: 3.2 + 2.8 + 4.1 + 6.4 = 4.5
So the mean of these numbers is: 4.5 4 = 1.125
Adding the 30 back on gives a mean for the original numbers of:
30 + 1.125 = 31.125

Example 16.4 A set of numbers has a mean of 6 and a range of 7.

What happens to i the mean and ii range when the numbers are:
a multiplied by 2? b increased by 5?
a i As each number has doubled, the mean will also double. For example, if the
numbers were 3, 5 and 10, then the new numbers would be 6, 10 and 20.
3 + 5 + 10 = 6 and the new mean is
The old mean is 6 + 10 + 20 = 12.
3 3
ii The old range is 10 3 = 7 and the new range is 20 6 = 14. So the range
also doubles.
b i As each number has increased by 5, the mean will also increase by 5. For
example, if the numbers were 3, 5 and 10, then the new numbers would be
8, 10 and 15.
3 + 5 + 10 = 6 and the new mean is 8
The old mean is + 10 + 15 = 11.

3 3
ii The old range is 10 3 = 7 and the new range is 15 8 = 7, which is still
the same.

Exercise 16B Find the mean of 34, 35, 37, 39, 42. Use 37 as the assumed mean.

Find the mean of 18, 19, 20, 21, 27. Use 20 as the assumed mean.
6
The heights, in centimetres, of five brothers are 110, 112, 115, 119 and 124. Find
their mean height using an assumed mean of 110 cm.

Four pupils each use a trundle wheel to measure the length of their school field in
metres. Their results are 161.0, 164.5, 162.5 and 165.0. Find the mean of their
results using an assumed mean of 160 m.

237
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 238

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

6 A box of matches has Average contents 600 written on it. Sunil counts the matches
in 10 boxes and obtains the following results: 588, 592, 600, 601, 603, 603, 604,
605, 605, 607. Calculate the mean number of matches using an assumed mean of
600. Comment on your answer.

The mean of five numbers 5, 9, 10, 20 and x is 10. Find the value of x.

Write down three numbers with a mean of 7 and a range of 4.

Write down three numbers with a median of 6 and a range of 3.

The mean of five numbers is 7, the mode is 10 and the range is 7. What are five
possible numbers?

The mean of a set of numbers is 5 and the range is 6. The numbers are now doubled.
a What is the new mean?
b What is the new range?

The mean of a set of numbers is 11 and the range is 8. The numbers are now
increased by 5.
a What is the new mean?
b What is the new range?

The mode of a set of numbers is 15 and the range is 6. The numbers are now halved.
a What is the new mode?
b What is the new range?

Draw two straight lines of different lengths. Ask other pupils to estimate the
lengths of the lines and record the results. Calculate the mean and range of
the estimates for each line. Compare the accuracy of the estimates for the
two lines. You could then extend this by repeating for two curved lines and
compare the accuracy of the estimates for straight and curved lines.

Drawing frequency diagrams

Look at the picture. How could
the organisers record the
finishing times to find out when
most of the runners finish?

238
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 239

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Example 16.5 Construct a frequency diagram for

the data about journey times shown. Journey times t (minutes) Frequency
0 < t 15 4
15 < t 30 5
30 < t 45 10
45 < t 60 6

It is important that the diagram has Journey times

a title and labels as shown. 12
10
8

Frequency
6
4
2
0
0 15 30 45 60
Time (minutes)

Example 16.6 Look at the graph for ice-cream sales. In which month were sales at their highest?
Give a reason why you think this happened.

Ice-cream sales
100
90
Average sales per day ()

80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0
r
r
ch

er
r
ry

ay

be
e
ril

be
us

be
ar

l
n

Ju

ob
ua

M
ar

Ap

em
Ju

em
ru

m
Au
M
n

ct
te
b
Ja

ec
ov
O
Fe

D
Se

Month

The highest sales were in August (92 per day). This was probably because the
weather was warmer, as people tend to buy ice-creams in warm weather.

239
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 240

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

6 Exercise 16C For each frequency table, construct a frequency diagram.

a Aircraft flight times: b Temperatures of capital cities:
Time T (h) Frequency Temperature T (C) Frequency
0<T1 3 0<T5 2
1<T2 6 5 < T 10 6
2<T3 8 10 < T 15 11
3<T4 7 15 < T 20 12
4<T5 4 20 < T 25 7

c Length of metal rods: d Mass of animals on a farm:

Length l (cm) Frequency Mass M (kg) Frequency
0 < l 10 9 0 < M 20 15
10 < l 20 12 20 < M 40 23
20 < l 30 6 40 < M 60 32
30 < l 40 3 60 < M 80 12
80 < M 100 6

The graph below shows the mean monthly temperature for two cities.
Mean temperature for two cities
30

25
Average temperature (C)

20
City A
15
City B
10

0
r
r
ch

er
r
ry

ay

be
e
ril

be
us

be
ar

l
n

Ju

ob
ua

M
ar

Ap

em
Ju

em
ru

m
Au
M
n

ct
te
b
Ja

ec
ov
O
Fe

D
Se

Month

a Which city has the hottest mean monthly temperature?

b Which city has the coldest mean monthly temperature?
c How many months of the year is the temperature higher in city A than city B?
d What is the difference in average temperature between the two cities in February?
e Which city has the greater range of temperature over the year? Explain your answer.

Use a travel brochure to compare the temperatures of two European destinations.

Make a poster to advertise one destination as being better than the other.

240
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 241

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Comparing data

79 m 153 m

Look at the picture. What is the range of the golfers shots?

Example 16.7 The table shows the mean and range of basketball scores for two teams:

Team A Team B
Mean 75 84
Range 20 10

Compare the mean and range and explain what they tell you.
The means tell you that the average score for team B is higher than that for team A,
so they have higher scores generally.
The range compares the difference in their lowest and highest scores. Team A have
the greater range, so there is more variation in their scores. You could say that they
are less consistent.

Exercise 16D A factory worker records the start and finish times of a series of the same job.

Job number 1 2 3 4 5
6
Start time 9.00 am 9.20 am 9.50 am 10.10 am 10.20 am
Finish time 9.15 am 9.45 am 10.06 am 10.18 am 10.37 am

Work out the range of the time taken for this job.

The minimum and maximum temperatures are recorded for four counties in England
in April.

County Northumberland Leicestershire Oxfordshire Surrey

Minimum 2 C 4 C 4 C 4.5 C
Maximum 12 C 15 C 16.5 C 17.5 C

a Find the range of the temperatures for each county.

b Comment on any differences you notice.

241
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 242

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

6 The table shows the mean and range of a set of test scores for Jon and Matt.

Jon Matt
Mean 64 71
Range 35 23

Compare the mean and range and explain what they tell you.

Fiona recorded how long, to the nearest hour, Everlast, Powercell and Electro
batteries lasted in her CD player. She did five trials of each make of battery.
Her results are as follows.

Everlast Powercell Electro

6 4 9
5 6 8
6 3 9
6 3 9
7 4 9

a Find the mean and range of the lifetime for each make of battery.
b Everlast batteries cost 1.00 each, Powercell 50p each, and Electro 1.50 each.
Which type of battery would you buy, and why?

A teacher has two routes to school. One week he uses a motorway, and another
week he uses country lanes. He records how long it takes him to get to school each
day for the two weeks. The results are shown in the table.

Time taken using motorway Time taken using country lanes

(minutes) (minutes)
Monday 35 22
Tuesday 20 25
Wednesday 15 24
Thursday 14 27
Friday 16 22

a Find the mean and range for each type of journey.

b Which route to school should he use, and why?

7 Use an atlas or another data source (the Internet or a software program) to

compare the populations of the four largest cities in China and the United
States of America, using the mean and the range.

242
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 243

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Comparing sets of data

Two cars A and B each cost 20 000 when they were new.
The graphs show how the values of the cars fell over eight years.

Value of car A Value of car B

25 000 25000
20 000 20000
Value ()

Value ()
15 000 15000
10 000 10000
5000 5000
0 0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Years Years

Which car fell in value more? How can you tell?

Example 16.8 A teacher is comparing the reasons for absence of pupils who have time off school.
The charts show the reasons for absence of two different year groups.

Year 8 Year 10

Sick Sick

Dentist Dentist

Holiday Holiday

Unauthorised Unauthorised

One hundred pupils in Year 8 had time off school, and 40 pupils in Year 10.
The teacher says, The charts show that more pupils were off sick in Year 10.
Explain why the charts do not show this.
In Year 8 the number of pupils off sick was a quarter of 100, which is 25.
In Year 10 the number of pupils off sick was a half of 40, which is 20. So fewer
pupils were off sick in Year 10.

Exercise 16E The graph shows the attendance

at two concerts, a classical
concert and a rock concert.
120
Attendance at concerts
6
100
Comment on the proportion of 80
Percentage

children attending each concert. 60 Children

40 Adults
20
0
Classical Rock

243
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 244

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

One hundred pupils

7 took two tests, a science
test and a maths test.
60
Test results

The results are shown 50

on the graph.

Number of students
40
Which test did the Science
pupils find more 30
difficult? Explain your Maths
answer. 20

10

0
010 1120 2130 3140 4150 5160
Marks

The chart shows the percentage of trains that were on time and late during one day.

Train arrivals

6 pm to 8 pm

4 pm to 6 pm

2 pm to 4 pm
On time
12 pm to 2 pm
Late
10 am to 12 pm

8 am to 10 am

6 am to 8 am

0% 50% 100%

a Compare the times late for different parts of the day.

b Comment on what you would expect to happen between 8 pm and 10 pm.

6 Here are two sets of data for the

weights of a sample of two different
makes of 400 gram chocolate bars.
Chucky Bar (grams)
401
Choctastic (grams)
391
1 Calculate the mean and range of 407 410
the data for each sample.
405 407
2 Draw charts to compare the two
makes of chocolate. 404 402

3 Comment on which one you 403 413

would buy. 404 395

244
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:10 Page 245

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Experimental and theoretical probability

Look at the picture. Would you say the
chance of the jigsaw pieces coming out
of the box face up is evens, or do more
pieces come out face down every time?

Example 16.9 Design and carry out an experiment to test whether drawing pins usually land with
the pin pointing up or the pin pointing down.

Count out 50 drawing pins, then drop them onto a table.

Record the number with the pin pointing up and the number with the pin pointing down.
Suppose that 30 point up and 20 point down.
We could then say that the experimental probability of a pin pointing up is: 30 3
50 = 5 .

Exercise 16F Darren says that if someone is asked to think of a number from 1 to 10, they will
pick 3 or 7 more often than any other number.
a What is the theoretical probability that a person will choose 3 or 7?
6
b Design and carry out an experiment to test Darrens prediction.
c Compare the experimental and theoretical probabilities.

a What is the theoretical probability that an ordinary fair dice lands on the number 6?
b What is the theoretical probability that an ordinary fair dice lands on an odd
number?
c Design and carry out an experiment to test these theoretical probabilities.

Five cards, numbered 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5,

are placed face down in a row as
shown. Cards are picked at random. 1 2 3 4 5
a What is the theoretical probability
that a person chooses the card with the number 2 on it?
b A gambler predicts that when people pick a card they will rarely pick the end
ones. Design and carry out an experiment to test his prediction.

a What is the theoretical probability that a coin lands on heads?

b Design and carry out an experiment to test this theoretical probability.

Two fair dice are thrown.

a Copy and complete the sample space
diagram for the total scores.
First dice
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1
b What is the theoretical probability of a 2
total score of 7?
3
c Design and carry out an experiment to Second
dice 4
test whether you think two dice are fair.
5
6

245
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:11 Page 246

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

6 Use computer software to simulate an experiment, for example tossing a coin

or rolling a dice. Work out the experimental probabilities after 10, 20, 30
results, and compare with the theoretical probability. Write down any pattern
that you notice. Repeat the experiment to see whether any pattern is repeated.

6 I can collect and record continuous data, choosing appropriate class intervals over a sensible
range to create frequency tables.
I can construct and interpret frequency diagrams.
I can identify all the outcomes when dealing with a combination of two experiments, using
diagrams or tables.

7
I can find the average and range from frequency diagrams.
I can compare distributions and comment on what I find.

1 2005 Paper 2

6 Here is some information about all the pupils in class 9A:

A teacher is going to choose a pupil from 9A at random.
Number
of boys
Number
of girls
a What is the probability that the pupil chosen will be a girl? Right-handed 13 14
b What is the probability that the pupil chosen will be left-handed? Left-handed 1 2
c The teacher chooses the pupil at random.
She tells the class that the pupil is left-handed.
What is the probability that this left-handed pupil is a boy?

2 2002 Paper 2

7 a From 5th May 2000 to 5th May 2001 a swimming

club had the same members.
Ages of members

Mean (5th May 2000) 24 years 3 months

Copy and complete the table to show information Range (5th May 2000) 4 years 8 months
about the ages of these members.
Mean (5th May 2001)

Range (5th May 2001)

246
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 30/4/08 17:11 Page 247

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

b The table shows information about members of a

different club. Ages of members

Mean 17 years 5 months

7
Range 2 years 0 months

A new member, aged 18 years 5 months, is going to join the club.

What will happen to the mean age of the members? Choose the correct statement from the following:
It will increase by more than 1 year.
It will increase by exactly 1 year.
It will increase by less than 1 year.
It will stay the same.
It is not possible to tell.

What will happen to the range of ages of the members? Choose the correct statement from the
following:
It will increase by more than 1 year.
It will increase by exactly 1 year.
It will increase by less than 1 year.
It will stay the same.
It is not possible to tell.

3 2002 Paper 2
The percentage charts show information about the wing length of adult blackbirds, measured to the
nearest millimetre.
Use the data to decide whether Key
these statements are true or false, Male
136140 mm
or whether there is not enough
information to tell. Explain your 0% 20% 40% 60% 80% 100% 131135 mm
answer.
Female 126130 mm
a The smallest males wing 121125 mm
length is larger than the 0% 20% 40% 60% 80% 100%
smallest females wing length.

b The biggest males wing length is larger than the biggest females wing length.

247
FM Ch 16 Questionnaire PB 8.3 30/4/08 17:24 Page 248

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Functional Maths

Questionnaire

Cris created a questionnaire for her Year 8 classmates. She went round asking 40 boys
and 40 girls the following questions.
a What is your favourite band or artist? b How many CDs do you possess?
c Which is your favourite Wii sporting game?
This is a summary of her results.
Boy/Girl Music CDs Wii Game Boy/Girl Music CDs Wii Game
Boy Fall out Boy 12 Bowling Girl Kate Nash 17 Bowling
Girl Arctic Monkeys 17 Bowling Boy Foo Fighters 32 Golf
Boy Panic! at Disco 27 Boxing Girl Arctic Monkeys 43 Bowling
Girl Kate Nash 34 Bowling Girl Spice Girls 26 Golf
Girl Fall out Boy 32 Bowling Boy Kate Nash 32 Boxing
Boy Foo Fighters 29 Boxing Boy Foo Fighters 44 Boxing
Boy Arctic Monkeys 43 Golf Boy Arctic Monkeys 53 Boxing
Boy Foo Fighters 41 Boxing Girl Kate Nash 45 Bowling
Girl Arctic Monkeys 23 Bowling Girl Foo Fighters 36 Bowling
Girl Arctic Monkeys 16 Golf Boy Fall out Boy 28 Boxing
Boy Foo Fighters 26 Boxing Boy Arctic Monkeys 16 Tennis
Girl Fall out Boy 37 Bowling Girl Foo Fighters 19 Tennis
Girl Foo Fighters 24 Bowling Boy Panic! at Disco 20 Golf
Boy Arctic Monkeys 16 Golf Girl Fall out Boy 31 Bowling
Boy Fall out Boy 33 Boxing Girl Fall out Boy 40 Bowling
Girl Kate Nash 45 Bowling Boy Arctic Monkeys 43 Bowling
Boy Foo Fighters 52 Tennis Girl Panic! at Disco 55 Golf
Girl Foo Fighters 37 Tennis Girl Foo Fighters 23 Bowling
Girl Kate Nash 13 Bowling Boy Kate Nash 27 Baseball
Girl Panic! at Disco 31 Bowling Boy Arctic Monkeys 35 Boxing
Boy Kate Nash 50 Golf Girl Kate Nash 31 Golf
Boy Arctic Monkeys 43 Bowling Boy Foo Fighters 28 Bowling
Boy Foo Fighters 25 Boxing Boy Panic! at Disco 46 Boxing
Girl Arctic Monkeys 30 Bowling Boy Fall out Boy 34 Boxing
Boy Fall out Boy 17 Bowling Girl Arctic Monkeys 26 Bowling
Girl Kate Nash 29 Tennis Boy Fall out Boy 18 Bowling
Girl Spice Girls 31 Golf Girl Foo Fighters 22 Tennis
Girl Arctic Monkeys 48 Bowling Girl Foo Fighters 40 Boxing
Boy Foo Fighters 38 Boxing Boy Arctic Monkeys 51 Golf
Boy Panic! at Disco 21 Bowling Boy Arctic Monkeys 42 Golf
Boy Fall out Boy 20 Tennis Girl Kate Nash 46 Tennis
Girl Kate Nash 37 Golf Girl Kate Nash 34 Boxing
Boy Foo Fighters 48 Boxing Boy Foo Fighters 50 Boxing
Boy Foo Fighters 23 Golf Girl Arctic Monkeys 43 Bowling
Boy Arctic Monkeys 19 Bowling Boy Foo Fighters 54 Baseball
Girl Kate Nash 24 Bowling Girl Panic! at Disco 23 Bowling
Girl Arctic Monkeys 52 Bowling Boy Foo Fighters 33 Boxing
Boy Kate Nash 49 Tennis Boy Fall out Boy 41 Boxing
Boy Foo Fighters 38 Golf Girl Fall out Boy 37 Bowling
Girl Panic! at Disco 25 Bowling Girl Kate Nash 46 Tennis

248
FM Ch 16 Questionnaire PB 8.3 30/4/08 17:24 Page 249

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

If a student was chosen from this sample at random, what

1 is the probability that the student:
a is a boy?
b likes Arctic Monkeys?
c has Tennis as their favourite Wii game?

Create a stem and leaf diagram for the number of

2 CDs owned.

What is the probability that a student chosen at random

3 from this sample will own more than 30 CDs?

a Complete a distribution chart of the number of students

4 who like each band and each Wii game.
For example, using just two of each, you would draw a
chart like this:
Arctic Monkeys 10 5
Fall out Boy 8 0
Bowling Golf

b Comment on anything you notice about the

distribution chart.

249
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 1/5/08 15:19 Page 250

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 1/5/08 15:19 Page 251

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

Index

A for roots 6, 7
for squaring 6
algebra 7081, 96111, 14457, 18499
cancelling 70
equations and formulae 14454
Celsius, converting to Fahrenheit 150
linear functions 98100
circles
with shapes 758
area 868
algebraic shorthand 702
chord 34, 82
alternate angles 224
circumference 82, 846
analysing data 1656
diameter 82, 84
angles
properties 823
alternate 224
radius 82, 84
corresponding 224
sector 83
geometric proof of 29
segment 83
interior 24
tangent 82
approximate conversions 92
comparing data 2414
arcs 82
compass bearings 2247
areas
congruent shapes 12830
circles 868
constructions 324
parallelograms 118
coordinates 100, 21618
prisms 8890
correlations 1645
rectangles 756, 118
corresponding angles 224
trapeziums 118
cube investigation 2278
average speed 1056

B D
bar charts 163 data
bearings 2247 analysing 1656
BIDMAS 175 collection 2346
bisectors 32 comparison 2414
BODMAS 1, 175 decimal places 113
box method 1223, 177 decimals
brackets dividing 1223, 17880
expanding 735 multiplying 1223, 1778
factorising 745 working with 11819
multiplying out 735 denominators 556, 174
ordering operations 1756 distancetime graphs 1057, 162
brick wall problems 2, 778 dividing
decimals 1223, 17880
C fractions 578
calculator negative numbers 13
efficient use of 1201
factorial button 43 E
(pi) key 84 elevations 21214

251
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 1/5/08 15:19 Page 252

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

enlargements 1347 Going on holiday 689

equations 712, 100 M25 11011
constructing 1889, 203 Taxes 1267
with negative numbers 1467 Football 1701
solving 1445 Shopping for bargains 1824
trial and improvement 1868 Train timetable 1989
unknowns on both sides 1489 Photographs 2323
equilateral triangles 31 Questionnaire 2489
estimations 11617, 122 functions
expansion 735, 1845 finding 98
expressions graphs of 1002
expanding brackets 735, 1845 inverse 98100
simplifying 703, 1845 linear 98100

G
F
generalisation 12
factors 35
geometric proofs 28
prime 79
geometry and measures 2234, 8293,
Fibonacci numbers 11
12842, 21228
flow diagrams 910, 202
gradients 1035, 18991
formulae graphs
change of subject 1945 of functions 1002
creating 1535, 2023 interpreting 1623
substituting into 1502 real-life 1913
fractions scatter 1645
adding and subtracting 567, 1734 straight line 1035, 18991
multiplying and dividing 578
rules 1723 H
unit 57 HCF and LCM 35, 8
fractions and decimals 5465
frequency diagrams 23840 I
Functional Maths imperial
analysing data 166 map scales 221
distancetime graphs 107, 162 units 913
imperial units 93 index notation 7880
interpreting diagrams 163 intercepts 103, 18991
logical problems 205, 210 interior angles 24
map scales 2201 isosceles triangles 31
mean temperature diagrams 240
multiplying decimals 124 L
percentage increase and decrease 62 like terms 723
percentages 60, 635 line segments 21618
real-life graphs 192 loci 2214
rounding large numbers 115 logic and proof 2045
scale drawings 21516 LOGO computer program 31, 133, 224
statistical surveys 159 lowest common multiple 35, 8, 56, 174
substituting into formulae 151, 1567, 203
Blackpool Tower 201 M
Fun in the fairground 523 magic squares, algebraic 3

252
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 1/5/08 15:19 Page 253

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

map powers
ratios 219 of 10 11214
scales 21921 in index form 7880
mapping diagrams 989 and prefixes 116
matchstick patterns 12, 14 and roots 57
means 2378, 2412 prime factors 79
medians 238 probability 378
metric units 889 calculating 445
measures 119 experimental 468, 2456
prefixes 116 scales 3940
mid-points, finding 21618 theoretical 46, 478, 245
modes 238 proportion 2067
multiplying
box method 1223, 177 Q
decimals 1223, 1778 quadrilaterals, geometric properties 29
fractions 578
negative numbers 13 R
mutually exclusive events 413 range 238, 2412
ratio 2079
N
maps 219
negative enlargements 1345 and shape 13942
negative numbers 13 real-life
in equations 1467 graphs 1057, 1913
nth numbers 5 problems 635
nth terms 1215, 204 reflections 130
number 5463, 11223, 17280 right-angled triangles 31
and algebra 117 rotations 131
problems 2003 rounding numbers 11216
rounding large numbers 11415
S
O
scale
order of operations 1756 drawings 21415, 2267
factors 1347
P maps 21921
(pi) 845 scalene triangles 31
parallel lines, drawing 25 scatter graphs 1645
pentagons 25 Schlegel diagrams 214
percentage increase and decrease 612 sequences 917
percentages 5960 solving problems in 1517, 203
real-life problems 635 series 174
perimeters 756 shape and ratio 13942
perpendiculars 323 simplifying expressions 713, 1845
pie charts 163, 243 solving problems 2009
planes of symmetry 1389 standard form 116
plans 21213 statistics 378, 15866, 23446
polygons assumed means 2378
exterior angles 267 surveys 1589
interior angles 257 stem-and-leaf diagrams 15961

253
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 1/5/08 15:19 Page 254

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

substituting trial and improvement 1868

into expressions 14950 triangle numbers 5
into formulae 1502 triangles
symmetry circumscribed and inscribed circles of 34
lines of 2930 classification 31
planes of 1389 geometric proofs of angles 28
rotational 2930
V
T VAT 62
term-to-term rules 13, 15 volumes
transformations 1303 cylinders 91
translations 131 prisms 8890
travel graphs 1057, 162

254
Maths Frameworking PB 8.3 Chs 1016 1/5/08 15:19 Page 256

HarperCollinsPublishers 2008 - Licensed for home use only. Not for whiteboard or general classroom use

William Collins dream of knowledge for all began with the publication of his first book in 1819. A self-educated mill worker, he not only
enriched millions of lives, but also founded a flourishing publishing house. Today, staying true to this spirit, Collins books are packed with
inspiration, innovation and practical expertise. They place you at the centre of a world of possibility and give you exactly what you need to
explore it.
Collins. Freedom to teach.

Published by Collins Acknowledgments

An imprint of HarperCollinsPublishers The publishers thank the Qualifications and Curriculum Authority
77 85 Fulham Palace Road for granting permission to reproduce questions from past
Hammersmith National Curriculum Test papers for Key Stage 3 Maths.
London
W6 8JB The publishers wish to thank the following for permission to
reproduce photographs:
p.2021 (main image) Chris Schmidt / istockphoto.com,
Browse the complete Collins catalogue at
p.5253 (main image) Sergey Dubrovskiy / istockphoto.com,
www.collinseducation.com
p.6869 (main image) Stephen Strathdee / istockphoto.com,
p.6869 (inset images) Jovana Cetkovic and Lya Cattel /
istockphoto.com, p.110111 (main image) Jeff Driver /
HarperCollinsPublishers Limited 2008
istockphoto.com, p.126127 (main image) Angel Herrero de
Frutos / istockphoto.com, p.126127 (inset images)
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Matt Baker, Jennifer Sheets, Milos Luzanin, Mark Evans /
istockphoto.com, p.170171 (main image) istockphoto.com,
ISBN 978-0-00-726796-5
p.182183 (main image) Chris Howes, Wild Places
Photography / Alamy and (inset image) istockphoto.com,
Keith Gordon, Kevin Evans, Brian Speed and Trevor Senior
p.198199 (main image) Ren Mansi / istockphoto.com,
assert their moral rights to be identified as the authors of this
p.232233 (main image) Tetra Images / Alamy, p.248249
work.
(main image) Jovana Cetkovic / istockphoto.com
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be
Every effort has been made to trace copyright holders and to
reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any
obtain their permission for the use of copyright material. The
form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
authors and publishers will gladly receive any information
recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
enabling them to rectify any error or omission at the first
the Publisher or a licence permitting restricted copying in the
opportunity.
United Kingdom issued by the Copyright Licensing Agency Ltd.,
90 Tottenham Court Road, London W1T 4LP.

Any educational institution that has purchased one copy of this

publication may make unlimited duplicate copies for use
exclusively within that institution. Permission does not extend to
reproduction, storage within a retrieval system, or transmittal in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording or otherwise, of duplicate copies for
loaning, renting or selling to any other institution without the
permission of the Publisher.

British Library Cataloguing in Publication Data

A Catalogue record for this publication is available from the
British Library.

Commissioned by Melanie Hoffman and Katie Sergeant

Project managed by Priya Govindan
Edited by Brian Ashbury
Proofread by Amanda Dickson
Design and typesetting by Jordan Publishing Design
Covers by Oculus Design and Communications
Covers managed by Laura Deacon
Illustrations by Nigel Jordan, Tony Wilkins and Barking Dog Art
Printed and bound by Martins the Printers, Berwick-upon-Tweed
Production by Simon Moore